DT 
 351 
 
 RC12p 
 
 
 V » >? 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^.. 
 
 
 1 ■?■* 
 ^ ^ 
 
 
 ■^. 
 
 Z^^ ^^''i' 
 
 
 $^<-/^ ^ ,T. ^ *^ a ,^* 
 
 
 %»^^ 

 
 THE LIBRARY 
 
 OF 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY 
 
 OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 LOS ANGELES
 
 t^^^r^
 
 PROGRESS 
 
 THE AFRICAN MISSION, 
 
 CONSISTING OF 
 
 Messrs. RICHARDSON, EARTH, AND OVERWEG, 
 
 CENTRAL AFRICA. 
 
 \_Jlead before the Royal Geographical Society of London on 
 
 the Idth of January, the 24tth of March, and the 
 
 1 0th of November, 1851.]
 
 / 
 
 AFRICAN MISSION TO CENTRAL AFRICA. 
 
 3^/ 
 
 PROGRESS 
 
 Communicated by Mr. A. Petermatm. 
 This expedition is under the direction of Mr. James Richard- 
 son (well known from his travels in the northern portion of the 
 Great Sahra in 1845 and 1846), who is directed by the English 
 Government to proceed to Tripoli, and thence across the Sahra 
 to the Bilad el Siidan or Negroland as far as lake Chad, for the 
 purpose of concluding commercial treaties with the chiefs of the 
 countries he is to visit. Dr. Barth and Dr. Overweg, two Ger- 
 mans, accompany him for the purpose of making scientific obser- 
 vations, with the express sanction of the English Government, 
 and upon the special recommendation of the Geographical Society 
 at Berlin, and Plis Excellency the Chevalier Bunsen. After 
 having thoroughly explored lake Chad and the surrounding 
 country, Mr. Richardson will return northwards to Tripoli, on the 
 direct Bornii route, while the two German travellers intend com- 
 mencing the more difficult part of their journey, crossing the Line 
 on their way to Mombas (Mombasah). The entire journey, if 
 made in a direct line, will exceed the distance from Tripoli to the 
 Cape of Good Hope. 
 
 On the 8th December, 1849, Dr. Barth and Dr. Overweg went 
 in the steamer from Marseilles to Philippeville, in Algeria, where 
 they landed on the 11th. In Tunis, which they reached on the 
 14th, they made various purchases of cloth and other objects ne- 
 cessary for their travels, and engaged as servant a negro from the 
 Bilad el Siidan (between Sakatii and Bornu), who speaks Arabic, 
 Italian, and French fluently, besides the language of his own 
 country. From Tunis they proceeded to Tripoli, partly by land 
 and partly by sea, where they arrived before Mr. Richardson. The 
 time they had to wait for the latter gentleman, was usefully employed 
 in preparations for the journey, and in an excursion to the moun- 
 tainous region south of Trijioli. This region, which was explorec 
 by the travellers from the 2nd to the 24th February, 1850, lies 
 about 50 miles S. of Tripoli, and extends 150 miles in a direction 
 from W.S.W. to E.N.E. It does not form a separate range of 
 mountains, but is rather the northern edge of a grent tableland, 
 the average elevation of which is from 2000 to oOOO feet above 
 the level of the sen. Its three divisions are distinguished as 
 the Yofran or Jebel, the Ghariyan (i. e. Troglodytes), and 
 
 B 2 
 
 122()d^rt
 
 4 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 the Tarhonah, the first of which lies S.W. of Tripoli, and con- 
 sists, geologically, of limestone and sandstone, with substrata of 
 variegated marl and gypsum ; it is so dry and stony, that dates, 
 olives, and figs can be cultivated only in the Wadis or valleys. 
 Volcanic formations occur in the Ghariyan division, which is 
 situated due south of Tripoli. In this group, basaltic cones, sur- 
 mounted by slender colunms, break through the white limestone 
 hills. The mighty mount of Tekkurt,* near the Ghariyan defile, 
 has a fine extinct crater. The soil of this district consists of a rich 
 red loam, extremely fertile, and covered with the most luxuriant 
 plantations of olive-trees and saffron. It is in this rich loam thaf 
 the inhabitants have dug their subterranean dwellings. The 
 Tarhonah mountains, forming the third division, and lying S. E. of 
 Tripoli, are lower than the preceding groups, and are characterized 
 by the general cultivation of grain, and abundance of Roman 
 remains. 
 
 Such is a brief outline of the general character of this region, a 
 full account of which, by Dr. Earth, with a valuable map, has 
 been sent home. It may also be added that an unexpected 
 degree of cold was experienced in their excursion : on one day, 
 the thermometer, before sunrise, stood as low as 26° Fahr., and 
 on the 2nd and 3rd of February the snow obliged the travellers 
 to remain in their tents. The winter seems to have been un- 
 usually severe for those countries. In Ghadamis, snow fell several 
 times, and at Suknd, it came down in such quantities, that the 
 inhabitants apprehended the destruction of their houses ; even at 
 Murziik ice of the thickness of a finger was formed on small 
 pools of water. 
 
 After their return to Tripoli, some more weeks were required 
 for their preparations, and the transport of the boat for navigating 
 lake Chad caused considerable difficulty. For this purpose, a 
 beautiful wherry had been constructed by the direction of the 
 Admiral at Malta, broad in the beam, and as light as a cork on 
 water ; but it was necessary to take it to pieces, and more than 
 eight camels were requisite to convey it during a four months' 
 journey across the burning sands of the Sahra. 
 
 The party started, at last, on the 23rd March, 1850, the 
 great caravan having departed before them ; but the party 
 formed a small caravan of itself, having about 40 camels, laden 
 with their effects and merchandise. Another important servant 
 had been secured by them at Tripoli, in the person of a trading 
 Bagdermi negro, who has travelled from his native country to 
 Tripoli several times, is ac(juainted with the principal merchants 
 in Bornu, and, besides his mother tongue, speaks the languages 
 
 * This Berber word is the name of a town in S. Algeria, spelt Tegort in our 
 maps. Tekiirt, or Tekiut, is pronounced in Barbary Tegurt or Tugurt ; the 
 letter kaf having in the West the sound of «7 in good, get, give. &c.— K.
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 5 
 
 of Bornii and Mandarah, the countries to be explored by the 
 expedition. The greatest possible assistance was rendered by 
 Her Majesty's Consuls in Tripoli and jNIurzuk to the undertaking, 
 so that the expedition started under the most favourable circum- 
 stances. 
 
 The direction of the route to Murziik was almost due south 
 from Tripoli, beyond the Ghariyan defile, the country consisting 
 of a continuous table-land, of an average elevation of 2000 feet. 
 As far as the Well of Tabdniyah, many deep Wadis intersect 
 this table-land, and the ruins of several Roman monuments and 
 columns were discovered by the travellers. Southward of that 
 place is a table-land or Hamadah, an immense desert of con- 
 siderably greater elevation, and extending for about 110 geogra- 
 phical miles in the same direction. As far as the eye can reach 
 neither trees nor indications of wells are visible, and the scanty 
 vegetation which occurs, is only found here and there in the trifling- 
 irregularities of the surface. The ground is covered w^ith small 
 stones, pyramids of which, erected with great labour, serve as 
 road marks to the intrepid camel-drivers by day, while the Polar 
 Star and Antares are their guides by night. After six long days' 
 journey, the expedition reached the southern edge of this table- 
 land, which descends in perpendicular walls to the Wadi el 
 Hessi. Following the descent for about 60 geographical miles, 
 the travellers came to the Wadi Shi'ati,* over another plateau of 
 equally dismal aspect. It is composed of a black sandstone, the 
 disintegration of which forms a dark yellow sand, covering the 
 inequalities of the stony surface, from which stands out promi- 
 nently the black rock, in high cones of the most fantastic forms, 
 strikingly representing basaltic rocks. They reached Murziik f 
 on the 6th of May, and remained there till the 12th, collecting 
 much important information respecting the countries and nations 
 to the south. Murziik is very unhealthy and dangerous for 
 Europeans, but happily none of the party suffered during their stay. 
 
 On the 1 "ith of June they set off for Ghat, w^hich they reached 
 on the 17th of July. The most interesting result of this journey 
 was the discovery of several curious sculptures on the rocks of 
 the Wadi Felisjareh. One of them consists of two human figures 
 with the heads of birds and a bull, armed with spears, shields, and 
 arrows, and fighting for a child ; the other is a fine herd of oxen 
 going to a watering place, — most skilfully grouped and executed. 
 In the opinion of the travellers the tw^o works bear a striking and 
 unmistakeable resemblance to the sculptures of Egypt. They are 
 evidently of much higher antiquity than many other sculptured 
 
 * Shi'ati or Shiyati'; probably the former, which signifies split or divided.— R. 
 t Murziik, an Arabic participle, is the name of the Ikni Marzu'k, a trihe which 
 formerly dwelt there —R-
 
 f) Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 tablets found by tbe travellers, on wliich camels formed generally 
 the principal objects. 
 
 The party started from Gh it after a stay of some days, for the 
 kingdom of Air* or Asben ; they had to cross a va^^t desert, totally 
 uninhabited for about 250 geographical miles, and succeeded in 
 reaching Tarajit, the first inhabited place in Air, on the 22d 
 August, where they intended to make some stay, as that country 
 had never before been visited by Europeans. 
 
 From letters of a later date, since received, it appears that Mr. 
 Richardson and his party, five days after the period last mentioned, 
 had experienced repeated attacks from treacherous and fanatic 
 7'awai-ik,t their lives having been in great peril. On reaching the 
 frontiers of the kingdom of An- they were surrounded and followed 
 by large numbers of the Hagar-Tawarik,:j: on one occasion by as 
 many as 100 armed men. After having escaped from these bands, 
 with the loss of most of their goods, the inhabitants of Air also 
 commenced hostilities, taking away all their camels. Some pious 
 Mussulmans of Seluflyeh, however, fortunately took them under 
 their protection, promising to see tbem safe to Tm-Tellust, the 
 residence of the Emir, el Niir, Sheikh of the Kelowis, to whom 
 the travellers were recommended. 
 
 II. First Letter from Dr. Barth to Dr. Behe. 
 Communicated by Dr. Beke. 
 
 Ti'n-Tellust, 2nd October, 1850. 
 
 My dear Sir, — You will, I suppose, have already heard of 
 the various misfortunes tliat have befallen us on our way to this 
 country, which, as it was never before visited by any European, 
 except, perhaps, by Hornemann, could not be ventured into without 
 great risk. Our difficulties, thank God ! are over ; and we have 
 passed the last four weeks in tolerable security, though not in 
 enjoyment of the liberty requisite for exploring Air, as we are 
 detained like prisoners in this vilhige, the residence of the power- 
 ful She'ikh-cl-Nur, who has taken us under his protection. 
 
 The central position of this interesting country, however, has 
 afforded us an opportunity of making very satisfactory inquiries 
 about the surrounding desert, and we have been able to obtain 
 
 * Perhaps Hdldr in Leo Africanus (p. 10) and Ibu Balutah (p. 45): the Kdhir 
 is the reading in Kosegarten's and RI. de Slant's version (Jour. Asiat. 1843, 
 
 p. 237). Obs. The aspirate in Ilahir -b\^ is hardly sounded at all : hence the 
 travellers thought it was Air. — K. See Cooley's 'Negroland' for Ahu" and 
 Kaliir. — Ed. 
 
 t Tawarik is the plural of Tarki (the Tergates of Leo Africanus), pp. 10, 47, 
 and seems to be a general name assumed by the Berbers in the Sahra. As the 
 final consonants have always the surd, not the sonant, power, k (kaf) regains its 
 proper sound at the end of words. — R. According to Leo, the Tergates formed 
 only one of five desert tribes. — Ed. 
 
 J Heggars, Ibn Batutah, Journ. Asiat., Mars 1813, p. 238.— R.
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 7 
 
 very credible reports respecting the country itself, which was never 
 supposed in Europe to be a territory containing more than a hun- 
 dred villages. Mr. Richardson has forwarded the result of his 
 inquiries to England, and I have sent mine to Berlin, reserving a 
 short report, which I shall forward to your Government on my 
 return from Agadez, the Sultan's residence, which is about 150 
 English miles distant westwards from hence. I shall set out for 
 that capital to-morrow, accompanied by an able and trustworthy 
 relation of the Sheikh, and carry very little luggage. 
 
 This journey, which it has been very difficult to perform, as 
 well on account of the dangers on the road, as from the small 
 provision allowed for our expenditure, will enable me to see some 
 of the finest parts of Asben, and will bring me into communi- 
 cation with the large tribes settled westwards, who command the 
 road between this country and Sakatu. Besides which, Agadez 
 itself deserves to be visited, and we should certahily be deserving 
 of much reproach if, after staying so long in Air, we did not even 
 try to reach that capital. 
 
 The whole of the Great Desert, or Sahni, will, I trust, assume 
 a very different appearance in consequence of our researches ; but 
 it is not possible at present, when all our time is taken up in 
 recording the result of our inquiries, to send to our friends in 
 Europe more than very short notices of what we have learnt. 
 
 As such you must consider the 
 
 1. Route from Asiyii to Tutcdt, which I received from 'Abd-el- 
 Ivadir, an intelligent native of 'A'in-es-sallah,* who had travelled 
 by this road twice. A kafilah,t (^. e. party of travellers), lightly 
 laden, can perform the journey, he says, in 25 days, but his sub- 
 joined itinerary gives 404 All the horses used in Asben are 
 brought from Tuwat, with which much intercourse is kept up. 
 
 After a journey of four days the kafilah reaches the territory of 
 the Imrat [Imghat ?], a very ])redatory tribe, extending all the way 
 between Tm-tellust and Agadez. Five days further on are the 
 Plains of the Sakamaren, a branch of the Hagara possessed of 
 large herds of cattle, and supplying a great part of An* with 
 butter. The Hagara, who are at a considerable distance to the 
 north of this road, are at enmity with their neighbours, so that 
 there is an unoccupied tract of some days' journey between them. 
 
 Adjoining to the Sakamaren are the Kel-emcUcl {i. e. ^Vhite 
 Kel), closely united with the Tawarik-ei-baidha {i. e. White 
 Tarkahs) on account of their wearing a white dress, and the 
 
 * Saint's Spring, near the extremity of Tuwat, 27° 30' N. and 1° 3' E. of 
 Greenwich, according to Major I.ainp, who was there in January, 182(i. — \\. 
 
 t Kafilah in Arabic=Karaviin in Pei.sian. — \{. 
 
 X At 10' per diem=r4(»(i', and :'5 days at 10' a-tlay = 400'; a satisfactory approxi- 
 mation. — R.
 
 8 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 Harar ; but the Kel-emellel are a branch of the Great Kelowis* 
 tribe. The Kiiluhet are mixed with the Kel-emellel. 
 
 The kafilah leaving Asiyu for Tuwat reaches on ihajirst day the 
 W^di, Kel-siif (Valley of Wool-Kels), through which it passes 
 for the three followinrf days in a direction nearly due west, and on 
 the fourth reaches the large ghadir (pool) of Telelelt, enclosed 
 between two cliffs, where there is plenty of Hashish [herbage] and 
 Talhah [acacia gummifera] . Here all the water in the valley 
 is collected together, and the ravine takes a southerly direction. 
 From Telelelt the soil is on the first day, sandy ; on the second, 
 rocky ; and at noon (dhohor) on the third day, the kafilah reaches 
 Insenuwan, where water is collected in a narrow and deep reser- 
 voir hewn out of the rocks. Hashish, and the fersik-tree are 
 plentiful here. 
 
 Continuing for two days along the same Wadi', the kafilah 
 reaches the well el-Hajrah at al 'ashtl [8 h. p.m.], where water 
 is found in hollows among the rocks above the valley. 
 
 At noon on the second day from el-Hajrah, the date-kafilahs 
 stop at Esta, where there is no water, and from that place descend 
 for a considerable distance into a wide valley where there is 
 liashish, talhah, and fersik ; and continuing in a westerly course, 
 at the beginning of el keilah (the siesta) on the tliird day 
 reach Teharah, where water is found just beneath the surface of 
 the ground. 
 
 The road then passes over uneven rocky ground, intersected by 
 many irregular wadi's, and on the fourth day water is found at 
 Tenakhordt, inclosed by very precipitous rocks. 
 
 The road here turns from a westerly to a northerly direction, 
 the soil being still rocky, with much hashish ; and at the begin- 
 ning of el keilah on the fourth day, the first well, called Arak, 
 [Salvadora Persica,] is reached, in a large valley bearing that 
 name. This is followed for two days, and at dhohor on the fourth 
 the second watering-place, Artik, is found between high rocks. 
 
 At this station the kafilah quits the wadi, and, passing over an 
 argillaceous, pebbly level, again comes near to the rocks at 
 the hour of al 'asha on the third day, and halts at the watering 
 place. El Terretimin, on the rocks near which, there are many 
 drawings and inscriptions. 
 
 This is the beginning of the Wadi Agemamar, in which, at 
 about 'Asha, on the third day, the frst, and on the sixth the second 
 well bearing that name is reached. 
 
 These valleys are succeeded by a complete desert as far as 
 Khaneg (Khauik) about moghreb (sunset) of the third day, where, 
 at the foot of the distant rocks, hashish is found. 
 
 Before keilah on the third day, constantly travelling between 
 chains of mountains, the poor slaves reach El Sha'ab, where there 
 * KoUuwi in Hornemann, v} 2 (i. 151, Langlos' French Version). — R.
 
 3fission to Central Africa. 9 
 
 is plenty of grass, but no water ; nor is any found till they reach 
 the well Hasi el kowe'irah in the morning of the second day, 
 where it is abundant, together with the hashish called damaran, 
 at the foot of a precipitous rock. 
 
 A desert, with rocks interspersed here and there, is then tra- 
 versed, and on the morning of the second day the kafilah enters 
 Tuwat. 
 
 III. — Report on Agddez by Dr. Bartk. 
 Communicated through the Chevalier Bunsen, by Lord Palmerston. 
 
 In taking the road to the Bilad el-Sudan by way of Air, never 
 before visited by Europeans, the African mission had from the 
 first, an intention of reaching, if possible, the town of Agadez. 
 From Leo Africanus, and more recently from the inquiries made 
 by the traveller, Paul Lucas, Agadez was known in Europe long 
 before the name of the Kelowis, or even before the existence of 
 the Tawarik had been discovered. 
 
 As soon, therefore, after our arrival as circumstances permitted, 
 and the population of Air had become more accustomed to see 
 Europeans and Christians among them, I resolved to make an 
 excursion from Tin-Tellust, the residence of the Sheikh, el Nur, 
 to Agadez, and, having intimated my intention to Mr, Richardson, 
 communicated with the Sheikh, in order to obtain his guaranty 
 and the protection of a party of his people proceeding to Agadez 
 to witness the investiture of the new Sultan, Abd-el-Kadir. 
 
 El Nur, having received a present of the value of 11/., con- 
 sented, and the valiant Hamma, his son-in law, was appointed to 
 take me safe to Agadez, to show me the place, and to conduct 
 me back in safety. "Mr. Richardson, who, according to the stipu- 
 lation made between us, had promised to repay the value of the 
 present made to El Nur, furnished me also with a present for 
 the Sultan of Agadez, consisting of a fine bernus, an Egy])tian 
 shawl, and some other articles, when, taking with me a copy of 
 the treaty drawn up by Mr. Richardson, in order, if possible, 
 to get it signed by the Sultan, I started on the 4th of October 
 for Agadez. 
 
 On my journey to, as well as from, Tin-Tellust, I took a more 
 easterly road than the common one, which passes by Asodi and 
 the Wadi Tellwa, touching this latter only in the Wadf Anderez, 
 which, like all the larger and deeper Wadis in this mountainous 
 and most interesting tract of country, where basaltic formations 
 take the place of granite, is extremely rich in duui-trees,* and 
 presents a really tropical character. In this part is found plenty 
 of wild beasts, principally lions and wild boars, also gazels (inclu- 
 
 * PropL-rly dauiii, often pronounc.nl dom. It is the forked palm — Crucifera 
 Thebaica, not found farther N. than in the Sa'id or Upper Egypt. Its fruit is 
 called Mokl by the Arabs. — \{.
 
 1 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 ding the larger species called mareiyah*), ostriches, and mon- 
 keys, 
 
 I was seven days in going and six in returning, and following 
 up the road each way with the compass I was able to lay it down 
 on the map most accurately. But reserving an extract of the 
 itinerary and a map of the road for the appendix to the report on 
 the town of Agadez, I will here only mention that I had already 
 discovered from the reports of the people that it is wrongly placed 
 in all our maps, being rather to the S.S.W. of Tin-Tellust. 
 
 When I arrived at Agadez the investiture (sarauta) of the new- 
 Sultan had not taken place, and Abd-el-Kadir was still living 
 in the private apartments of the palace (a gi'oup of about twenty 
 houses situated towards the western end of the town, from which it 
 is separated by a gate) ; in the Haussa language it is called 
 " fadah." The same morning the Kelgeris, who had brought the 
 Sultan from Sakatu, followed by their families, their immense 
 flocks of camels and their cattle, left the place, and it was only 
 after they had departed that I could enter the town with some 
 security, in the company of the Kelowis. 
 
 Early in the morning after our arrival we paid our respects to 
 the Sultan. Abd-el-Kadir, ben e'Sultan, Mohammed-el-Bakr, 
 who had already before enjoyed that dignity during no less than 
 twenty years, is a stout man of about fifty-five years of age, with 
 large benevolent features, as far as the shawl wound round his 
 head and face permitted one to judge. Sitting in a large room, 
 supported by two short massive columns, and very simply dressed 
 in a large white shirt, he received me most kindly, and seemed 
 rather astonished that a person should pay him a visit, of whose 
 nation he had scarcely heard mention, excepting in connection 
 with gunpowder. 
 
 I delivered the presents intrusted to me by Mr. Richardson, 
 and the letters from the Sheikh, el Nur, and assured the Sultan 
 that, though I had come alone, I paid him also the respects of my 
 companions. The treaty I could not with prudence mention in 
 the presence of the Kelowis, nor did circumstances allow me 
 afterwards to try to get the paper signed by him. Indeed the 
 fact that the first European who ever visited this place, travelling 
 as such, was well received not only by the authorities, but also by 
 the people of the town, is a matter of really greater consequence 
 than if by some intrigue or other (for it would scarcely have been 
 possible otherwise) 1 should have succeeded in obtaining the sig- 
 nature of a paper which could be of no importance as long as the 
 Sultan of Sakatu had not signed it. Agadez being merely of im- 
 portance to European commerce because it lies on the most 
 direct road from the Mediterranean to Sakatu, it would have 
 been interesting for one of us to have taken this road ; but the 
 
 * One large species of antelope is called Mare'iyah, i. e. remarkable. — R.
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 11 
 
 losses we had suffered did not allow of it. The Sultan of Sakatu, 
 whose authority as Eim'r-el-Mumenin is very great, having signed 
 the contract, an English merchant, passing by Agadez, will not 
 have to pay more than an Arab, viz. four dollars for every camel- 
 load. It is of great importance, and will make the name of the 
 English respected through the whole road to the interior, that 
 the Sultan has severely punished those tribes which had attacked 
 and plundered us, as I shall have occasion to mention hereafter. 
 
 The Sultan, who had not looked at the gifts in our presence, 
 expressed his satisfaction immediately afterwards by sending me 
 a fat ram, and henceforth he invariably sent dinner and supper 
 every day, and most frequently a particular dish for myself made 
 of corn, com being regarded in this country as a princely dish. 
 When the Sultan left for the razzia he had the kindness'to send 
 me provisions from his camp, in order that his guest might not 
 be inhospitably treated during his absence. 
 
 The investiture of the Sultan did not take place until four days 
 after our arrival, on the 16th of October, or the first day of the 
 great Mussulman feast called by the Arabs " Id-el-Kebir," and 
 in the Haussa language " Sallalajeh." Early in the morning the 
 Sultan of the Kelowi's, Astafidet, who has his residence in Asodi, 
 made his entrance at the head of about 400 of his people, which 
 was but a small part of the force which he had collected together. 
 They rode directly to the fadah or palace, where the ceremony 
 was to take place, for which ten of the chief men of the Itesan 
 and the Kelgeri's had already arrived the day before. 
 
 Abd-el-Kadir was then conducted by the principal people of 
 the three tribes mentioned, from his private apartment to the 
 public one. The leaders of the Itesan and Kelgeris, who went 
 in front, then begged him to sit down upon the gado, a sort of 
 couch made of the branches of the dum-tree, similar to those used 
 in Egypt, covered with mats and a carpet. Upon this the Saltan 
 sat down, resting his feet on the ground, but he was not allowed 
 to put them upon the gado, or to make himself comfortable in the 
 Oriental style, before the Kelowis asked him to do so. Such is 
 the ceremony of the combination of these Tawarik tribes in the 
 investiture of the Sultan. 
 
 Immediately after this ceremony was over, the religious one of 
 the great Mahometan feast took place, the two being combined this 
 time for greater splendour. 
 
 About half-past eight in the morning the procession, which I 
 witnessed from the terrace of our house, left the fadah, taking its 
 way through the southern part of the town, after which turning to 
 the N. it went round the whole till it reached a place about a 
 /juarter of an hour to the ^V. of the town, where, near the tomb 
 of a saint of no great fame, called Sidi Hamada, there are some 
 graves. On this spot, according to an ancient custom, the Sultan
 
 12 J\Iissw7i to Central Africa. 
 
 with all his suite has to pray on this great holiday of the Mos- 
 lims. The prayers being finished, the procession returned by the 
 southern part of the town, and at about ten o'clock the different 
 parties separated. 
 
 This ceremony or procession was very interesting, as it exhi- 
 bited a considerable number of Tawarik of different tribes in 
 their best array. In front of all, accompanied by the musicians, 
 rode the Sultan, enveloped, over his fine Sudan robe, in the blue 
 bernus the Englishman had brought him, which was admired 
 by everybody as the most beautiful ever seen here ; and these 
 tribes were extremely pleased that a person should come from afar 
 in order to present to their Sultan so fine a dress to be worn on 
 the day of their great ceremony. 
 
 Next to the Sultan rode the two Serki-n-Turawas, after whom 
 followed the Chiefs of the Itesan and Kelgeris, on horseback, in 
 full dress and armour, with their swords, daggers, long spears, 
 and immense shields ; then came the longer train of the Ke- 
 lowis, mostly on Meherls/ with their Sultan, Astafidet, at their 
 head, and last of all came the people of the town. Indeed the 
 whole recalled the chivalrous processions of the middle ages, the 
 more so as the high cap of the Tawarik, enveloped by a profu- 
 sion of tassels on every side, together with the black nedi", which 
 covers the whole face, leaving but the eyes visible, and the shawls 
 wound round the head, quite partake of the character of the helmet, 
 while the glittering black robes, over which on such a day the 
 principal people wear a red bernus thrown over their shoulders, 
 very well represent the heavier dress of the knights of yore. 
 
 Immediately after this ceremony was over the people deliber- 
 ated respecting an expedition — "razzia" in Arabic, "jaki"in 
 Haussa — to be undertaken against the Avelimmiden,* or, more 
 properly, the Meharebin or freebooters ; and councils of the chiefs 
 and the Sultan were also held. A great Maraboot, Sidi R'alli 
 el Haj Annur, whom I shall mention afterwards, had made peace 
 between the Kelowi's and the Kelgeris, and they agreed to act in 
 common. Amongst a warlike people like the Tawarik, expedi- 
 tions of such a kind do not require long preparations ; and after 
 a herald of the Sultan had proclaimed through the streets on the 
 lOtli the order of his master, that nobody should proceed on the 
 road to Damergii, Abd-el-Kadir departed on the evening of the 
 21st with about 700 men, among whom were 100 cavalry. 
 Instead, however, of proceeding southwards, as the proclamation 
 intimated, he marched North, encamping on the first night not 
 far from the town ; for it had been deemed more prudent to put 
 down first the roving spirit of the people to the north, and to 
 punish the freebooters of the Imrat, the Ikeskisan, and particu- 
 
 Also denominated by the Arabs " Mulathimmiin " (veiled). — R.
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 13 
 
 larly those of the tribes on the northern frontier of Air, who had 
 done so much mischief to our mission, viz. the Tede, the Kel-fede, 
 the Kel-hagar, and the Kel-razar. The Sultan and his council had 
 been in a state of great anxiety, fearing that the Avelimmiden, a 
 most powerful tribe, and, as I shall afterwards show, identical 
 with the Sorgu, or Serkiu-Tawarik, might join with the tribes to 
 the north. The Sultan re-entered Agadez, however, on the 7tb 
 of this month, and we had the satisfaction to learn that even the 
 highest men amongst the tribes which had taken away our pro- 
 perty had not been spared, and that the Sultan had taken nine 
 camels from the person who had deprived me of my Meherf. 
 
 As soon as I had learnt that the Sultan was about to leave, I 
 urged Hamma, under whose protection I was staying, to suggest 
 to him that a letter might be written to Her Majesty, in which 
 the Sultan should express his satisfaction that an Englishman 
 had visited him and brought him presents in her name. This, 
 at first, had been represented by Hamma as possible, but had 
 become rather difficult, the Sultan being always accompanied by 
 the different people that had arrived, besides which, in his peculiar 
 position, he could scarcely venture openly to write to a Christian 
 monarch. I was not able to obtain a second interview with him, 
 but on the morning of his departure, when he was sitting in the 
 courtyard of the fadah, surrounded by a great many people, 
 I thanked him for the kindness and particular attention he had 
 shown me, mentioning at the same time the letter to the Govern- 
 ment in whose service I was travelling.* The Sultan at once 
 turned the conversation in a very amiable manner to letters of 
 recommendation to his friends, the authorities in Sudan, and after 
 my return to my quarters, Hamma brought me three letters, in 
 which the Sultan had recommended me as his guest to the 
 Governors of Kami, Kashnah, and Daurah (a place between 
 Zender and Kami), and acquainted me at the same time that he 
 himself had received a letter from the Sultan for the Sheikh el 
 Niir, under whose protection and amongst whose people 1 had been. 
 
 As the people of El Nur were not able to buy provisions 
 enough in the market, I did not leave the town imtil ten days 
 after the Sultan had started for the expedition, when the town 
 had become quiet. During this time, as well as while Abd-el- 
 Kadir was at Agadez, I received visits from many persons, the 
 most considerable among whom were the nephew of the Sultan, 
 El Kalek, as well as the son of the Kadi, who visited me twice ; 
 also the former Serki-n-Turawa, Mohammed Boro, and a very 
 enlightened Mohammedan, Ma'llem (or Doctor of the Law) Haj 
 Mohammed Omar, who called upon me several times, conversing 
 freely respecting the difference between the Moslim creed and 
 
 * See the letter of the Sultan, p. 62.
 
 1 4 jSfissiou to Central Africa. 
 
 that of the Christians, and finally asked for a copy of the Gospel 
 in Arabic. Besides these I had interviews with two principal 
 men of the Itesan, who, in jiassing by the house where 1 lodged, 
 saluted me in a most friendly manner, shaking hands with me 
 from horseback, and assuring me of their friendship, as they 
 were on their way to join the Emir, el-Miimenin (Commander of 
 the Faithful). 
 
 Besides the ceremony of the investiture, and the expedition, the 
 most interesting circumstance which took place during my resi- 
 dence in Agadez was the passing of the immense salt caravan of 
 the Kelgens, which arrived on the 17th and started the next day 
 on its road to Bilmah, and which was said to consist of not less 
 than 10,000 camels. 
 
 Account of Agadez. 
 
 Agadez * or as the Tawarik call it, Ekade, is situated on a 
 Hamadah, or high plain, consisting of sandstone, and, at least 
 near its extremity, of granite covered with small pebbles, which 
 towards the north and east is very narrow, but becomes wider 
 towards the west and south. On this plain, w^hicli, though con- 
 taining no arable soil, furnishes a good deal of herbage and 
 wood in its slight but wdde depressions, the town of Agadez is 
 built. The Wadis, or valleys, which constitute all the inhabitable 
 ground of Asben or Air, do not furnish room for a large place, 
 all the dwelling-places, which are scattered over the country, 
 being mere villages, with the exception of Asodi, w^hich was in 
 former times a place of importance. But while Asodi seems to 
 have been once the real central point of all the country of Asben, 
 Agadez from the first, as is quite clear from its situation, was 
 intended as a sort of rendezvous between the Kelowi's and the 
 tribes which inhabit the districts to the south and west. No 
 author, as far as I know, has mentioned this place before Leo 
 Africanus, in whose time it was most flourishing. 
 
 There are traditions among the inimbitants of the place, and 
 particularly among the merchants from Tuwat and Ghadami's, 
 according to which it is most probable, that though Agadez was 
 not founded, it became at least more important, and grew into a 
 considerable town, by the arrival of the sections of several tribes 
 from the north. These tribes are called Arabs; but there is 
 no doubt that they belonged to the Berber race, converted 
 already to Islam, and influenced by the civilization of the 
 Arabs. 
 
 The settlement of these tribes in a place like Agadez, which 
 from natural reasons is the great central point for the commerce 
 of all this part of the interior of Africa, is perhaps of greater 
 
 * The correct 8])elling is evidently Akadaz, or Akadas, pronounced Egad6z. The 
 Tawjirik drop the final letter. — R.
 
 Mission to Central Africa . 15 
 
 interest than any other, excepting that of the Mesratah, who 
 belonged to the three most important commercial places of 
 Northern Africa, viz. to Tuwat, Ghadamis, and Aiijila. 
 
 To Tuwat belonged the Gurara, a tribe intimately connected 
 with the Berber race, which, till our days, has preserved a par- 
 ticular language or retana of its own, called el Zenatiyeh,* very 
 similar to the Tawarik. 
 
 From Ghadamis two tribes have settled in Agadez, the Tesko 
 and the Beni Uazith, and, as in former times there was a 
 well in Agadez, called Ghadamis, so the Tesko have given 
 their name to a well still in use. The Tesko consisted of two 
 families or feias, viz. the Beni Darar, and the Beni Maziar, 
 while the Beni Uazith were divided into four feias, viz. the Tan- 
 gazen, the Tefarfara, the Yeresan, and the Auelad Belil. (The 
 Tesko at present do not constitute a part of the inhabitants 
 of Ghadamis, having retired long ago to Beniolid.) Besides 
 these two tribes, there were settled in Agadez the Aujila, 
 a section of the inhabitants of the oasis of that name, who are 
 still among the most enterprising travellers and merchants of 
 the desert, and the Mesratah (inhabiting a group of more 
 than forty villages, four days' journey east of Tripoli, and called 
 by Europeans Mesuratah, the remnant of the once powerful 
 tribe of that name), who formerly possessed the fourth quarter of 
 Agadez. The inhabitants do not, like the merchants of the other 
 towns, pay any tribute or moddah to any Tawarik chief for his 
 protection on their journeys to the Sudan. The memory of the 
 residence of this tribe in Agadez is still living and attached to 
 several localities of the town. Almost all the other gates are 
 in ruins and are scarcely traceable, but the small gate which has 
 received its name from this tribe is still existing in the western 
 part of the wall ; a cistern also (which I shall mention hereafter) 
 is still called Mesratah, and to the north of the town there is a 
 well named after the Ben-Gummas, one of the three divisions of 
 the Mesratah, the names of the two others being Bu-Tarah, and 
 the Ben-Gottarah, who lived outside the wall to the west, where 
 the ruins of an extensive suburb are now seen. 
 
 Together with these tribes, of whose history we know some- 
 thing, there were settled in Agddez, the Tafimatah,t a tribe 
 whose origin I have not been able to trace. 
 
 As tradition does not say when those tribes settled in Agadez, 
 it is also silent respecting the period when they left the town, 
 but it has preserved a curious fact, viz. that when these Arabs, 
 as they are with some justice styled, and as the Arab formation of 
 
 * The Zenata were a principal tribe of the Berber race. — Ed. 
 t This name resembles TuJ'inek, the name given by the Berbers to their remark- 
 able and very ancient written character. — K.
 
 16 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 some of the names shows, left the place, they had 500 jekhfa or 
 cages, in which the wealthier Arahs carry their favourite women 
 on their journeys, with them. 
 
 The account of the settlement of the Arabs in Agddez is 
 confirmed by Leo Africanus, who, though he calls the people of 
 Agadez " Negroes," yet describes their manners as very similar 
 to those of the Arabs.* That the Arabs left the place long before 
 Leo (who did not visit Agadez himself) wrote his description of 
 Africa (1517), has been confirmed to me by the Mallem Haj 
 Mohammed Omar, who, when I questioned him concerning the 
 period when the town became so deserted as it now is, informed 
 me, that it first declined from its happiest state about 400 years 
 ago, when a great number of its inhabitants left the place. 
 
 There can be scarcely a doubt that it was either the Taw^arik 
 or the older inhabitants of Agadez, or of a neighbouring place, 
 who drove away the Arabs ; for there is a very old tradition, 
 according to which the present inhabitants of the town came from 
 a celebrated valley, called Irin AUem, about a day's journey 
 from Agadez to the north, where they are said to have lived 
 before ; and I was assured by the Tuwati, Abd- Allah, that 
 the ruins of some houses are still to be seen in that valley, as 
 well as two solitary date-trees bearing fruit, a very rare thing in 
 this country, where, as far as I know, there are no date-trees 
 except in a very few places, such as Iferuan and Chimmia. 
 There is another tradition, according to which the Itesan were the 
 eldest inhabitants of the place, from whom the present inhabitants 
 are descended by an intermixture with slaves. 
 
 The Emrjhedesie (or Emkedesi ) Lancjuacje. — There is, no doubt, 
 a good deal of slave blood among the present inhabitants of Agadez, 
 as is the case with the whole population of the south-eastern part 
 of Air, and principally in Tin-Tellust, but there must have been 
 a very ancient stock of indigenous black people, who have trans- 
 mitted from age to age a peculiar language of their own, " the 
 Eraghedesie," not a mere dialect of the Tarki', or the Berber, or 
 of the Haussa language, but a peculiar idiom, which is the same 
 
 LANGUAGE AS THAT SPOKEN BY THE PEOPLE OF TIMBUKTU and 
 
 of the eastern part of Bambarrah. So all, among whom were 
 several Tuwati, who had been in Timbuktu informed me, and the 
 correspondence of the four first of the numerals (for the people of 
 Agiidez do not count farther in their own language) and that of 
 some other words with those published in the Annals of Oriental 
 Literature, as cited by Prichard in his Researches into the 
 History of Mankind, show that they are correct. There is in 
 addition a curious resemblance between the language of the 
 
 * Leo distinctly says that many of the inhabitants were foreign merchants.— K.
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 17 
 
 people of Agndez and that of the people of Timbuktu, which I 
 will mention here, as it struck me with surprise. 
 
 The Sorgii-Tawarik, who iiave become known in Europe 
 from the quarter of the Niger, are unknown among the 
 Tawarik on this side and among the people of A'ir, and every 
 one smiled at me as often as I inquired respecting the Sorgu or 
 Sergii. On the contrar}-, every one knew the large and powerful 
 tribe of the Avelimmiden. 1 was thus quite at a loss respecting 
 the Sergii, when, on having placed among the phrases to be 
 translated in the Emghedesfe language — " where do the Avelim- 
 miden reside ?" all at once, instead of the Avelimmiden, men- 
 tion was made of the Sorgu or Sergii ; and I now learnt that 
 the people of Agadez, and they alone of all the people round 
 them, call the Avelimmiden by this name. I observed, also, 
 in the course of my researches, that they call the language of the 
 Tawarik in general, which is known under the name of Tema- 
 zight, by the particular name of Sergiuneki. This fact, viz, 
 the identity of the language of Agadez with that of the language 
 of the eastern part of Bambarrah, is of the greatest ethnological 
 interest, as it seems to prove that the people of Agadez are of 
 the same stock as the people of Bambarrah, and are perhaps the 
 remains of a great people, which in ancient times, before the 
 Tawarik appeared, occupied all this tract of country. It 
 seems at the same time that this district, and pi'obably also 
 the town of Agadez itself, was inhabited from a very remote 
 period by a peculiar people. Indeed all my inquiries whether 
 any tribe or the people of any town round about Agadez spoke 
 the same language, were answered in the negative, till at length 
 I was assured by a traveller that in a })art of Adar the same 
 language is spoken.* 
 
 It is scarcely pro])able that the people of Agadez should have 
 changed their language from a mere intercourse with Timbuktu, 
 even if such was, as it seems to have been, a most important one, 
 inasmuch so that Agadez became itself one of the first markets 
 for gold, and had its own standard of this precious metal. It is 
 odd that according to Leo Africanus the language of the people 
 of Agadez and that of Timbuktu were in his time quite dif- 
 ferent ; for while in Timbuktu and the adjacent countries the 
 Sungai language,! which most probably is identical with the idiom 
 of Bambarrah, was spoken, he says that the people of Agadez used 
 the language of Gober. One might as well say now that the 
 Haussa language, which seems to be identical with what Leo 
 
 * The Bambarali language is a Mandingo dialect ; and Dr. IJarth means pro- 
 bably that the Kissur (the language of Timbuktu) is spoken to the east of Baniba- 
 rah. — Ed. 
 
 f For the identity of the Kissiir, Songhai, and Timbuktu vocabularies, see Mr. 
 W. 13. Hodgson, of New York, on the same. — Ed. 
 
 C
 
 18 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 calls the language of Gober, is the idiom spoken in Agadez ; 
 Haussa being still at present the language of commerce and of 
 intercourse between the different tribes. 
 
 Agadez in former ages must have been a considerable and 
 wealthy place, containing not less than from 50,000 to 60,000 in- 
 hahitants, the circuit of the whole town being about three miles. I 
 was assured by the Tuwati, one of whom had been at Timbuktu 
 seven times, that it was without comparison larger than that cele- 
 brated place. Indeed it must have contained from 20,000 to 
 30,000 inhabitants as late as the beginning of this century, 
 when, as I learned from the Mallem Haj Mohammed Omar, the 
 greatest part of the inhabitants left the town, scattering themselves 
 over the towns and villages of Haussa, where living is cheaper. 
 
 At present the appearance of the town is that of an almost 
 ruined and deserted place. Scarcely the sixth part of it is in- 
 habited, the whole south quarter being entirely deserted, and 
 in the northern part there is a much greater number of ruined 
 houses than of inhabited. In my note to my colleagues, after 
 a three days' stay in Agadt'z, I estimated their number at not 
 more than 400. But after considerable investigation, and after 
 many inquiries, I am sure that I am not very wrong when I now 
 estimate the number of inhabited houses at about 700. Tbe houses 
 are generally spacious, and all those which I visited contain from 
 ten to fifteen inhabitants, so that the number of inhabitants, 
 including both sexes and all ages, may be from 7000 to 8000, 
 
 Commerce. — The inhabitants are at present, as in the time of Leo 
 Africanus, partly merchants and partly artisans. The merchants 
 seem only to visit the markets of Kashnah, Tasawah, Maradeh, 
 Kami, and Sakatii, in all which places countrymen of theirs are 
 settled ; but, as far as I learned, they never go to the northern 
 markets of Ghat or Murzuk, unless on a journey to Mecca, 
 which several of them have made. As for the commerce with 
 Timbuktu, all the intercourse with that place has now so com- 
 pletely been destroyed, that although I took all the pains possible, 
 I was not able to get the itinerary of this interesting route, and I 
 was assured by several that there was but one man, of a very 
 advanced age, who knew it, and that he was absent. The road 
 from Agadez to Mabruk is no longer used for commercial pur- 
 poses, but is infested by freebooting parties of the Kelferowan 
 from the route between Tuwiit and Timbuktu. 
 
 The commerce of Agadez itself is nothing but a speculation in 
 provisions, principally in ghussub* or kasab (millet), which con- 
 stitutes the principal and almost the only food of the inhabitants, 
 as well HI Haussa as in the country of Air, When a caravan arrives 
 
 * Ghussub, in imitation of Denmau, &c. Kasab is a generic term, signifying 
 " reed," or " grain." — U.
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 19 
 
 from Damergu, from whence all Air is supplied, the merchants buy 
 a large quantity at a low price, and keep it till it becomes dearer, 
 when they retail it in smaller parcels. But there being no coin 
 in the market (unless the strips of cotton called " kebbekah " be 
 regarded as such), all the buying and selling is done by exchange, 
 the principal objects with which people barter being " tourkedi " 
 (the dark-coloured cotton for female clothing made in Sudan) ; 
 the fine Egyj^tian coloured leather, called kornu, which they use 
 for the ornamental parts of their sandals, and of their leather 
 work ; mahmiidi, or English calico ; zubaetas, or white shawls, 
 which the wealthier people wind round their heads ; cloves, 
 pepper, pearls, etc. With these objects everything may be bought 
 in the market of Agadez, from the most valuable camel down to 
 a pound of meat, or a small cheese, though ghussub, which in 
 general is cheaper here than in Tm-tellust, is the standard currency 
 Q^ the market. The mithkal (3 dwt.), which is equal to 1000 kerdi 
 (Kauri's),* of which at present 2500 make an Austrian dollar, 
 being a mere nominal sort of money, according to which the 
 value of things is estimated. Cowries (kauris) have no currency 
 in the place ; while of the kebbekah, which I have mentioned 
 above, eight kamah or dhira (cubits) make one rijal, and ten 
 rijal or erjel are equal to one mithkal. 
 
 Manufactures. — The manufactures are very limited, con- 
 sisting merely in leather-work and mats. With leather-work 
 several classes of artisans are occupied, the shoe — or rather sandal- 
 makers, the saddlers, and those who make leather bags and 
 other things of a similar kind — the latter class consisting merely 
 of women. The sandals are as far famed as the saddles, 
 particularly those for mounting the meheri's or swift camels, 
 and are called rakhla in Arabic, kigi in Ten);ihirgh,t and si'rdi 
 in Haussa ; the other leather-work made by the women is also very 
 neat. All these things as well as the mats, which are of different 
 kinds from the coarser up to very handsome sorts of different 
 colours, are made in the houses themselves, there being at present 
 no shops in the town, though the ruins of the houses prove that in 
 former times there have been some on the north side of the 
 market, called Katanga. Even this part of the town, the most 
 frequented and important, where the three market places are, is 
 now surrounded with ruins of houses, on whose tops vultures watch 
 the whole day for their prey. 
 
 The three market-places lying almost in the centre of the 
 town and on the southern limit of the quarter, which is now most 
 inhabited, are as follows, proceeding from east to west : the 
 Kagwah n'delti, or the market of vegetables ; then the Kagwah 
 
 * Two-fifths of an Austrian dollar, or 2('(/. of our nionty. — R. 
 t Perhaps Temazight, i.e. Nobles. — II. 
 
 c "2
 
 20 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 narahoma, where it appears that formerly the camels were sold, 
 but which is now the place for selling meat and cattle, while the 
 camels at present are sold on the small place before Mohammed 
 Boro's house, called Enrarar en zakan ; and the third market, 
 called Katanga, where all other things are sold. 
 
 These markets are very poor, and were particularly so when I 
 visited the place, all things excepting provisions fetching a very low- 
 price. English calico of very good quality was sold at 20 per cent, 
 less than it had been bought for at Murzuk, while on other things the 
 loss was still more considerable. Indeed Ag;idez is in no respect 
 a place of resort for merchants, not even Arab, while, for Europe, its 
 only importance consists in its being the most direct road to Sakatii 
 and that part of the Siidan. I add here the prices of different 
 objects, as they were sold in the market during my residence in 
 the place, remarking, at the same time, that the price of things is 
 very difterent accordingly as-you exchange them for other objects, 
 or if you buy ghussub. 
 
 Mithkal, Rijul. 
 Ghussub, or Gafuli,* twenty sekkah (the sekkah of 
 Agadezbeing double as large as that used in Tin- 
 Tellust) ...... 1 
 
 Rice, ten sekkah . . . . .1 
 
 Camel, a young one two years old, not yet lit tor car- 
 rying things . . . . .18 
 
 Ditto, a full grown . . . '. .25 
 
 Horse, a good strong horse . . . .100 
 
 Ditto, a fine one ..... 1000 
 
 Ass . . . . . . .6-8 
 
 Ox 8 
 
 Calf ....... 4 
 
 Ram ....... 1 5 
 
 Sandals, a pair of common ones . . .01 
 
 Ditto, a pair of fine ones . . . . 5 
 
 Camel saddle, or Rakhla, a fine one . . .10 
 
 Ditto, a common one . . . . .5 
 
 Leather bag, ol" coloured leather . . .1 
 
 Mat, a fine coloured one . . .06 
 
 English calico, ten dhira' or kamah . . .1 
 
 Zubacta ...... 1 
 
 Kornu, or the fine Egyptian leather, the piece . 1 
 
 Tourkedi, of common workmanship . . .2 
 
 Ditto, of finer workmanship .... 3-5 
 
 Government. — The authority of the Sultan (Amanokal in Tema- 
 hirgli ; baban serki in llaussa ; kokeu in the Emghedesie lan- 
 guage) is not at all limited to the walls of the town, but is 
 rather greater outside than inside of it. As far as I could make 
 out, he does not receive any tax or tribute from the inhabitants, 
 but his only income (besides the presents sent him on his investi- 
 ture, and on other occasions, and besides a portion of the camels 
 
 * Kdfuli is another kind of grain. — R.
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 21 
 
 and flocks taken from freebooters, and other persons of that sort) 
 seems to arise from levying a duty of ten mithkdls on every 
 camel-load of merchandise that is brought into the town, provisions 
 being excepted. 
 
 He is, in reality, the Sultan of several Tawarik tribes, whose 
 union according to agreement is represented in him, and in the 
 whole of his investiture the inhabitants of Agadez have not a 
 word to say. The Itesan and the Kelgeris take him from Sakatu 
 to Agadez, where he is met by the chiefs of the Kelowi's, par- 
 ticularly by the Sheikh El Niir, or a person representing him, 
 who, if they are pleased with him, make him Sultan. He must 
 be taken always from one ftimily, whose origin, as the people say, 
 is from Stambul. Therefore, when the present Sultan, 'Abd el 
 Kadir, ben e' Sultan, Mohammed el Bakri, after he had been 
 Sultan for many years, was deposed, on account of dissensions 
 between the different tribes, in the month of Ramadan, 1265 
 (March of last year),* the Itesan and Kelgeris sought, or rather 
 had already sought his relative, Hamed el Arjau, who was made 
 Sultan, All the chiefs not being satisfied with the new Sultan, 
 another member of the same family, of the name of Makita, or 
 Imketen, living at Damergii, was elected Sultan by the dissentients. 
 In consequence of this disagreement, which was near causing a war 
 between the different tribes, the whole country was thrown into a 
 state of the greatest confusion, of which the Aulad Suleiman (Chil- 
 dren of Solomon) took advantage, which partly was the cause of the 
 disasters under which our party had suffered. But the more pru- 
 dent chiefs recurred once more to Abd el Kadi'r, who is considered 
 by the people to be the best of the family, and made him Sul- 
 tan a second time. During my stay in the place he imprisoned 
 for some days three chiefs of the Itesan, who had arrived from 
 Damergu in order to protest against him on the part of Makita. 
 Limited as may appear the power of the Sultan, and dependent as 
 he is upon the chief leaders of the Tawarik, lie has not only the right 
 to imprison, but even to take life. Neither the Sultan of the 
 Kelowi's, nor that of the Itesan, nor anybody else has the right to 
 punish a person with death, but is merely authorised to seize him 
 and to bring him before the Sultan, who, if he is found guilty, 
 orders him to be beheaded outside of the town a little to the 
 N.W., on a place called Azarmadarang. The Sultan, likewise, 
 is said to have a frightful dungeon, where, as I was told, the 
 guilty are thrown upon swords stuck upright in the ground. At 
 present he is traversing the country, waging war witli and 
 punishing the tribes that have troubled the country and in- 
 
 * As 1265 began 27th of November, 1848, Ramad.in, which is the 9th month, 
 began about the 21st of July, 1849, ami corresponded with August rather than 
 March.- K.
 
 22 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 fested the roads by their plundering excursions. Almost all 
 the principal persons of the country accompanied him, among 
 whom is the Chief of the Kelowis himself. The encampment 
 of the army, which consists of about 3000 people, has no one 
 central point, viz. the tent of the Sultan of Agadez, but there are 
 tioo separate encampments. While Abd el Kadir is surrounded 
 by the Kelgerfs, the Itesan, the Kelferwan, and the people of 
 his town, the Kelowis are encamped round the spot where their 
 own particular Sultan, Astafidet, dismounted. No one appears 
 to have a tent except the Sultan of Agadez, who has one of a grey 
 colour, but in other respects similar to those of the Tui'kish 
 A gas. 
 
 The court is formed by a number of servants or slaves, by 
 some musicians, and by a sort of aides-de-camp called fadawa'n 
 serki, viz. the sons of the former Serki-n-Tiirawa, or Minister, 
 Mohammed Boro, but he has no Wezir ; unless this title be 
 given to the Serki-n-Turawa. No doubt the Serki-n-Tiirawa * is 
 the first person in Agadez after the Sultan, but it was long 
 before I was able to make out what were the real duties of his 
 office, though the former Serki-n-Turawa, Mohammed Boro, had 
 been our travelling companion on our journey from Murzuk 
 to this country ; unfortunately circumstances had not allowed me 
 to secure at first the friendship of this respected person. 
 
 After many inquiries I learnt that the Serki-n-Tiirawa was 
 properly the superintendent of the Arabs visiting the place, and 
 I have no doubt that his office dates from a very remote period, 
 when. whole quarters of the town were inhabited by Arabs or by 
 Berbers, already influenced by Arab civilization, and no doubt 
 his office must have been of the greatest importance. At present 
 his office with regard to the Arabs has become quite a secondary 
 one. He has nothing else to do with the few Arabs, principally 
 Tuwatis, who still visit Agadez, sometimes staying there two or 
 three years, but to levy the tax on their mei'chandise, and to 
 bring it to the Sultan, who, according to custom, gives him a 
 small portion of it. On the contrary, the other part of the duty 
 of Serkf-n-Tdrawa, which has reference to the Tawarik, is at pre- 
 sent of much greater importance, for he has to accompany the 
 large salt caravan of the Kelgeri's, which annually supplies 
 Western Sudan with the salt of Bilmah, from Agadez to Sakatu, 
 for which he receives one kantu, that is to say the eighth part 
 (eight kantd weighing three Turkish kantars or quintals) of every 
 camel-load, which forms a considerable income ; the caravan 
 consisting generally of some thousand camels, and the kantu of 
 salt fetching in Sudan from two to three dollars. t 
 
 * Serki-n-Tiirawa, Chief of the Fulaui. Turawa in Ilaussa = a Fulan. — Ed. 
 f His annual income can thus amount to 20,000 or 25,000 dollars. — K.
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 23 
 
 After having brought the salt caravan to Sakatfi, the Serki- 
 n-Turawa annually has to go to Kanu, where he receives a small 
 portion of the 600 cowries, or duty levied on each slave brought 
 to the slave-market, after which he returns to Agadez with the 
 Kelgeris that have frequented the market of Kami. This long 
 annual journey, which brings the Serki-n-Turawa much more in 
 connection with the Tawarik than with the Arabs, makes him at 
 the same time a sort of intermediator between Agadez and Sakatu. 
 The former Serki-n-Turawa, Mohammed Boro, was a native of 
 Sakatu, where he has a house as well as in Agadez, Kami, and 
 Zinder. The present Serki-n-Turawa, whose name is Ashu, is, as 
 I was told, very rich. 
 
 All the civil cases which do not come under the jurisdiction of 
 the Serki-n-Turawa are brought before the Kadi, who imme- 
 diately upon hearing the parties gives his decision. [ was twice 
 present when an affair of some importance in dispute between my 
 companions the Kelowi's and a man from the town was brought 
 before him, which was decided in favour of the latter. The 
 Kadi resides near to the great mosque, which is under his 
 control. 
 
 Besides the Kadi, one of the principal men of the town seems 
 to be the respected Mallem Sidi Ghalli el Haj el Niir, but what 
 are his functions I could not learn. 
 
 Schools. — There are five or six schools in Agadez, where the 
 boys learn reading and writing the Koran ; nevertheless there are 
 but few persons here who understand Arabic. 
 
 Morals. — The women seem to enjoy great freedom, of which 
 they appeared to make full use, particularly after the Sultan had 
 departed. Some of them are pretty, and have Arab features, and 
 among the men, I observed fine northern faces and good figures. 
 The population is so mixed that it would be difficult to make out 
 the type of the original stock. 
 
 The names of different quarters are still preserved, and are as 
 follows : — Katangha, Gawa Ingirsou, Tafimata, Katiii, Kaswa, 
 Ikenfeia, Amourieuel, Imurdiin, and Rcf la ; but besides Kaswa 
 and Katangha (the markets), whose position I have mentioned 
 before, I could not define their exact position. The extensive 
 southern part of the town is quite deserted, and is separated 
 in most parts from the northern quarter by an open irregular 
 space, where there are three pools of stagnant water, called 
 Digi, Therjeman (most probably so called from the interpreters, 
 who in former times had there their quarters) — and the third, 
 Mesratah. 
 
 The whole town being entirely on a level, with the exception of 
 five or six small hills formed in course of time by the rubbish, there 
 is a view from every terrace over the town, so that I was able to
 
 24 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 make a sketch of the western part from the terrace of onr house, 
 which I used to frequent daily for one or two liours. 
 
 Buil(lin[)s. — The buiklings are generally spacious, and are 
 arranged in the following manner : the door leads immediately 
 into an oblong room, extending through, with a separation on each 
 side of the passage, formed by a sort of balustrade provided with 
 mats, where the servants sleep. This first leads into a second and 
 similar room, where, instead of matt^, there are sometimes bedsteads. 
 From this second room, where the private apartments begin, two 
 doors generally lead into a more or less spacious courtyard 
 — " tsakan gidah " — surrounded by rooms in a very irregular 
 manner. In this courtyard there are generally other bedsteads, 
 covered on the top and on two ?ides with mats, and some- 
 times a shady place, enclosed on all sides with mats, is formed. 
 The houses are built of mud, and a few are whitewashed ; they 
 are all Hat roofed, the roof being formed by planks of the diim- 
 tree covered with mats, over which earth is thrown, and in the 
 houses of the wealthier peof)le, there is an upper story, — soro — 
 consisting generally of one very large room, to which a staircase, 
 " abenhawa," leads from the courtyard. 
 
 The houses are arranged most aj)propriate to the climate, and 
 similar to that in which, as I was assured by my friends the 
 Tuwatis, the houses of Timbuktu are built, and being enlivened 
 by children, doves, and young ostriches, present a curious sight 
 to the traveller. 
 
 Of public buildings af present there are but few, and out 
 of seventy mosque.:^, which are said to have adorned the town in 
 former times, but ten are still in use ; not more than three of 
 these seem to deserve the name besides the great mosque ; they 
 are called Msid Mili, Msid Eheni, and Msi'd el Mekki. Even 
 the great mosque, which is near to the fadah, has nothing 
 particular about it, except a high tower, called Mesallajeli* 
 For a place such as Agadez, which, like Timbuktu, is situated 
 in the midst of warlike hordes, a high tower is of the greatest 
 importance, in order to be aware beforehand when a razzia or 
 a caravan is approaching. Agadez had therefore such a tower 
 probably from the remotest period, but the present one is of 
 recent date, having been begun six years ago, and it has just been 
 finished ; the ruins of the former are seen at a little distance 
 to the south-west. I was very sorry that I was not allowed 
 to ascend it, the Kadi, who seemed to have some antipathy 
 against Christians, assuring my companion, Ilamma, in my 
 presence, that there was at present no entrance to the tower, 
 tlie former one having been walled up on account of the Kelgeri's, 
 who continually desired to go up to the top. 
 
 "^ Masalla signifies \n Arabic a place of prayer. — 1{.
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 25 
 
 In its construction the tower is very simple, being built entirely 
 of the same materials as the houses, viz. earth and wood. On 
 the ground a number of thick quadrangular pillars, in several 
 rows, support a more solid roof than is usually seen here, and 
 form several halls. From them the tower, measuring at its base 
 about thirty feet at each of its four sides, rises to a height of about 
 ninety or ninety-five feet ; the earthen walls diminish in thickness, 
 so that each side does not measure more than about eight feet 
 at the top, and are strengthened and supported by thirteen 
 layers of planks of the dum-tree, which, not closing together, 
 project on every side about three or four feet, while in the interior 
 they form a kind of ladder for ascending the tower. There are 
 seven openings on each side, by which the interior receives light. 
 
 Tiie town is surrounded at a little distance by slight undu- 
 lations in the stony surface, of great extent, where in a sandy soil 
 there is plenty of brushwood (all talhah-trees, Acacia Arabica), of 
 herbage, and wells of very good water. This is a great advantage 
 to the place, the caravans finding food enough for their camels 
 near the town, while in most of such places it is necessary to 
 send the camels oif to a great distance. There is also plenty of 
 firewood. These ))leasant valleys, where you may forget that you 
 are on a stony hamadah, have different names ; that to the S.W., 
 which is at a greater distance, and where the salt caravan of the 
 Kelgeris was encamped, being called Mermeru ; that to tlie 
 S.E., Tesak ; that to the N., quite near to the walls at the north- 
 western corner, having the name of Ameluli; and finally, the 
 one to the N.E., on the road to Ti'n-Tellust, is called Ta- 
 gurast.* These valleys near the wells are capable of culti- 
 vation, but at present there are only two small orchards in Ame- 
 luli, where vegetables are cultivated, all the other vegetables and 
 fruits consumed by the inhabitants, such as melons, cucumbers, 
 and principally melukhiyah (corchorus olitorius), being brought 
 from the valley called " el Ilakhsas," about three hours distant 
 to the N. of the town. 
 
 Ail the loatcr which is used for drinking in Agadez is brought 
 from the wells which are situated in these depressions, the water 
 inside the walls having a disagreeable taste, and, cool as it is, 
 being considered unwholesome. There were formerly eight wells 
 in the town, all sunk thnmgh rocky ground to a great di^pth, 
 but at ])resent only three are in use, the others being filled up ; 
 of those still in use, the principal one, a little W. of the market, is 
 called Shedwankah ; the names of some others which have an his- 
 torical interest have been mentioned before. 
 
 * See Map.
 
 26 
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 I. 
 
 Vocabulary of the Emghedesie Language. 
 
 sun 
 
 uonu 
 
 mountain 
 
 thanji 
 
 moon 
 
 handn 
 
 valley 
 
 ar'zer 
 
 heaTCtt 
 
 biui 
 
 road 
 
 henbiri 
 
 earth 
 
 kendia 
 
 house 
 
 hakau 
 
 water 
 
 ari 
 
 garden 
 
 aferrek 
 
 fire 
 
 horu 
 
 horse 
 
 bar 
 
 witti 
 
 ahiu 
 
 camel 
 
 jau 
 
 rain 
 
 kerneki 
 
 ox 
 
 hau 
 
 day 
 
 zaezeru 
 
 donkey 
 
 farka 
 
 night 
 
 kiggi 
 
 sheep 
 
 henkun 
 
 (morning 
 
 elfejr 
 
 goat 
 
 figgi 
 
 month 
 
 hendun 
 
 ostrich 
 
 ter'atter* 
 
 year 
 
 kiri 
 
 fowl 
 
 kernekii 
 
 to-day 
 
 zaezeru 
 
 good 
 
 akin 
 
 yesterday 
 
 baei 
 
 bad 
 
 adeskab 
 
 (to-morrow 
 
 e'suebha 
 
 dear 
 
 cgeb 
 
 people 
 man 
 
 aberua 
 berfiia 
 
 cheap 
 
 i enegeb 
 [er'aderaji 
 
 woman 
 
 waei 
 
 much 
 
 bc'bbau 
 
 child 
 
 azekaena 
 
 little (few) 
 
 ke'tta 
 
 father 
 
 eubaba 
 
 great 
 
 bir 
 
 mother 
 
 enana 
 
 small 
 
 haketta 
 
 brother 
 
 biri 
 
 warm 
 
 arekenbafir ? 
 
 sister 
 
 kaena 
 
 cold 
 
 kauirasnaci ? 
 
 Sultan 
 
 kokeu 
 
 new 
 
 elthaki 
 
 friend 
 
 ennoa 
 
 old 
 
 hajenu 
 
 head 
 
 benrii 
 
 strong 
 
 kebbau 
 
 body 
 
 guengo 
 
 weak 
 
 emm'ekau 
 
 mouth 
 
 mai 
 
 heavy 
 
 kateno 
 
 nose 
 
 nini 
 
 light 
 
 hafesQsa 
 
 eyes 
 
 miia 
 
 far 
 
 amtir 
 
 heart 
 
 tekersut 
 
 near 
 
 amenekti 
 
 hand 
 
 kanba 
 
 white 
 
 kajura 
 
 foot 
 
 kae 
 
 black 
 
 bibo 
 
 milk 
 
 haul 
 
 fast 
 
 thanbi 
 
 cheese 
 
 kishi 
 
 all 
 
 keffo 
 
 butter 
 
 ki 
 
 more 
 
 bebbu 
 
 meat 
 
 hamu 
 
 less 
 
 ajeb (identical with 
 
 salt 
 
 kin' 
 
 
 e'geb) 
 
 dates 
 
 gueriie 
 
 how much 
 
 mergi 
 
 rice 
 
 mau 
 
 where 
 
 mekikel 
 
 ghussub 
 
 haeni 
 
 here 
 
 enkiri 
 
 shirt 
 
 tekejm 
 
 on 
 
 bin 
 
 blue shirt 
 
 teblua 
 
 under 
 
 keudi 
 
 (robe) 
 cap 
 
 fagel 
 
 when 
 
 /mend-effu 
 tlek-uffii 
 
 (trousers 
 
 uendii (Haussa) 
 
 now 
 
 waei 
 
 sandals 
 
 ta'mii 
 
 before 
 
 ^ggar' 
 
 desert 
 
 keni'ggi 
 
 why 
 
 bmi?? 
 
 village 
 
 kdra 
 
 yes 
 
 iik 
 
 town 
 
 kar 
 
 no 
 
 hor 
 
 tree 
 
 tamet 
 
 go 
 
 koi 
 
 source 
 
 mu 
 
 come 
 
 aj6 
 
 well 
 
 benikkau 
 
 give 
 
 ettan^i ? ?
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 '17 
 
 put 
 
 sakker 
 
 I have 
 
 aberaidaru 
 
 lift up 
 
 dok 
 
 thou hast 
 
 aberader'u 
 
 take 
 
 ji'nni 
 
 he has 
 
 aberaidar'u 
 
 beat 
 
 baket 
 
 we have 
 
 aberabodaru 
 
 bind 
 
 haul 
 
 you have 
 
 aberaidaru 
 
 mount 
 
 kir 
 
 they have 
 
 aber'ajarajudarii 
 
 dismount 
 
 zenbu(keti) 
 
 I 
 
 ar'ae, ar'aedh 
 
 buy 
 
 animerr'a 
 
 thou 
 
 ki 
 
 sell 
 
 daye 
 
 he 
 
 ar'u 
 
 drink 
 
 nin 
 
 she 
 
 tamendemt ? 
 
 eat 
 
 wau 
 
 we 
 
 ar'i'da 
 
 speak 
 
 kiman& 
 
 you 
 
 hennor'u 
 
 hear 
 
 mau 
 
 they 
 
 ar'iu 
 
 see 
 
 hasi 
 
 they (fem.) 
 
 ar'idu 
 
 be silent 
 
 danr'i 
 
 one 
 
 nifo, fem. kifo 
 
 he died 
 
 ab6n 
 
 two 
 
 ahiuka 
 
 he knows 
 
 aibain 
 
 three 
 
 ahinza 
 
 we arrive 
 
 aitu(keti) 
 
 four 
 
 etthaki 
 
 The Emghedesie people do not count further than four ; 
 make use of the Arabic. 
 
 from five upwards they 
 
 Give me something 
 
 Give me water, that I may wash my 
 
 hands 
 IJring the camel-saddle, the sword, and 
 
 the lance 
 To-night you will have moonlight 
 The Sim is very warm to-day 
 Yesterday there was much rain 
 You must bring firewood, it is cold 
 I am very ill to-day, I must take 
 
 medicine 
 To-morrow we shall start early 
 The people of Agaddz are ignorant 
 
 people ; they do not know what is 
 
 right 
 Thy father and mother are still living, 
 
 or are they dead ? 
 Where live (encamp) the Aveltmvdilen ? 
 
 have they a greater number of camels 
 
 or of horses ? 
 
 how do they call their market-place ? 
 Bcgi 
 This woman has milk to sell ; will you 
 
 buy it ? 
 
 All the women in Agadez, if you ex- 
 cept very few, are come from Sudtin 
 there is scarcely one that knows Tc- 
 muhiryh (the Targiah) 
 
 nqf'i haefo x 
 
 nar'i ari ayahimmi ankanba 
 
 kau zauketi elkif u takoba u igi 
 
 aro' kiggi ame hende'in guma 
 
 uenu zaezeru karmi bebba 
 
 bi ari babo 
 
 koi sdkete tugiijio ye 
 
 dari bebba zaezeru aibara annasa s6- 
 
 fari 
 E'subha and el fejr airekeu 
 bai-eii Eghedes en bareii futii, ennebi 
 
 haeka kim 
 
 auana anbaba anne hina ko abuu 
 
 Kora zenbu Surku me yau abebbii mm 
 bard abe'bbii 
 
 yobu Surgu auenni 
 
 Begi 
 
 [ Wae ro hua abeni eddaro aibara eudaye 
 
 d()r ?] Wae ro ame hua aibara audai- 
 
 anga 
 Azoi'u engekai (? Eghede) akauteri end 
 
 e' Sudan 
 maho kifo uibi Serkiuneki 
 
 A SHORT DIALOGUE. 
 
 How do you do ? 
 
 How is your family ? 
 
 How does it go on ? 
 
 How is the state of health of the people 
 
 of your house ? 
 (All) well? 
 What people are arrived from Sudan ; 
 
 what news have you got from Sudan? 
 
 sendi'nkini 
 
 ma kenne hug'e 
 
 manarciien 
 
 [ma u'shttfet aberua men hog'ii] ma u 
 
 hog'u koiiu 
 [koiia] elrafia 
 abcrua meudeni ati'iin da e' Suddn. ma 
 
 u'lsaleu atehcu nesi men e' Sudan
 
 28 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 All quiet. [kuthi] el rafia 
 
 The market has been, or has it not been ? [Ma 'enuiba abera ko eshi'ah] aibara koi 
 
 yubu ashianga 
 
 (Were the prices) dear or cheap ? ligeb ko anegc'b 
 
 When do we start for Sudan ; to-mor- mand-effa airekoye e' Sudan e' subbahko 
 
 row or after to-morrow ? bibifu 
 
 To-morrow. e' subhah 
 
 We do not go ; no, we go in the night. ari hur'i, ari-s-ekkeu; hor'i, kiggi aire- 
 koye 
 
 What are the news ? ma n' isalen 
 
 The news I did know, which news you I'salen abera anibae isalen ndbi isalen 
 
 know ; that are the news which you engonudii ze rannin, nibai arae hriri 
 
 know. I told (all) what I have heard, ze inau, nin ki ni'bai haeka 
 
 but you know nothing. 
 
 Come, I will tell you (something). Eyii her nesi ar'ae 
 
 I come. ar'ae nekaye 
 
 Tell me. herresi 
 
 Come, we will go to that place. okiu keti airekaye da' effau 
 
 I go not (now), wait and we will go. a-s-ekkoye sebberu aire-koye 
 
 Let us go and eatbazeen? Aire-u-koye ari-wau thasu 
 
 ' II. 
 
 Route from Agcidez to Sakatu. 
 
 1st day. The caravan starts from Agiidez in the aj'ternoon, and the people 
 encamp in the Wadi, called Uleije, where there is a well. 
 
 2nd. Kerbiib, a VVadi, where there is water in the sand. You arrive after 
 sunset, having started at daybreak. 
 
 3rd. Aa'zerii — arrival at sunset ; started before daylight. Between Kerbub and 
 Aa'zeru there are but very few stones, but all is covered with pebbles, and here 
 and there a little sand. 
 
 4th. Tcberhurt — arrival after sunset, having passed a watering-plac ailed 
 Aruthes. All pebbles and stones. 
 
 5th. //((/«/, a small town— arrival at sunset. Pebbles; very few stones. From 
 Ingal the town of Agadez is provided with cattle. A gate is called kiifa n Ingal. 
 
 tith. A wcll^ whose name my informant did not remember. Arrival at about 
 four o'clock in the afternoon. 
 
 7th. Afai/en, a Wadi, where you arrive at the Aser. Pebbles and sand. 
 
 8th. You encamp on the i)lain a little before sunset. 
 
 9th. The same ; but here covered with some herbage. At sunset. 
 
 10th. A spot called Semyetayew — arrival at sunset. 
 
 11th. Jubeli, a considerable place; the market of the Kelgeris, belonging to 
 Adar, whose territory begins here. V'ou arrive at the Aser, after having passed 
 on your road Tesak. v 
 
 12th. Avelimmidtu — an encampment at sunset. 
 
 loth. Erzdrur, a village — arrival about one o'clock. Road very stony. 
 
 14th. Tc'/)/*//", a village — at sunset. Koad stony. 
 
 15th. Duhiausu, a village — about one o'clock. 
 
 IGth. ilfwz/;;', a village— at sunset. Always stones. 
 
 I7th. A'hhw;', a village. Arrival a little after noon. All rocky. 
 
 18th. A/'/a', a village — at sunset. 
 
 19th. Warnu, a considerable place — at one o'clock. 
 
 20th. Sakatu, where you arrive a little after sunset. 
 
 III. 
 
 Route from Agddez to Marddeh, according to the Kelgeris, Gojeri. 
 
 1st day. Er'zer, a Wadi, where you arrive at the Aser, after having started from 
 Agadez in tlie morning. 
 
 2nd. Emrc'nded, a VVadi— arrival at the Aser.
 
 Mission to Central Africa. '29 
 
 3rd. Urzedem, a Wadl — at sunset, after having travelled over sand. 
 
 4th. A valley, which, according to Gojcri, is called Temie, but which, according 
 to his companion R'aser, bears the name of Af€n kuk. You arrive at tJie Aser. 
 There is water in the valley. 
 
 5th. A valley called Tewuilu according to Gojeri, according to R'aser Begem, 
 where you arrive at sunset. 
 
 6th. Akiikii, where you arrive at the Aser, after having passed a Wadi, called 
 Zeriten, where you fill your water-skins. The whole road consists of pebbles. 
 
 7th. Ter'draderez, a \Yadi — arrival at the Aser. 
 
 8th. Etiddul, high sand-hills, where you arrive about noon. 
 
 9th. le'nheh, a Wadi — about two o'clock in the afternoon. 
 
 10th. Yanie'mma, a valley with water, where you arrive at Aser. 
 
 11th. Zermenetta, a village^arrival about the Aser. 
 
 12th. Avelimmid, a considerable place, where you arrive about one o'clock in 
 the afternoon. 
 
 GoBEK. 
 
 Here begins a country of considerable extent, and inhabited by a warlike set 
 of people, with whom the, Sultan of Sakatu is always waging war, generally 
 w ithout success, and without being able to convert them to Islam. After their 
 capital (Gober) had been destroyed by the Fellanis (the so-called Felhitahs), 
 they built a new town* not far from Maradeh, with whose inhaiiitants they are 
 intimately connected, by their common interest, as opposed to the Mohammedans ; 
 and I was assured that the people of Gober had become more powerful than ever, 
 and that there was very little probability of the Fellanis ever beinjj able to 
 subject the country of Gober to their sway or to their creed. ' 
 
 The other villages and small towns of Gober are as follows : — Aknija, Layem, 
 Ginde'sem, Kelenzel, Me'ddoo, Te'llel, Deri, Mi'ge'shee, Uenidu, Ariwa, Kiillum, 
 a considerable place, where the first Thobeli (chief ^ of the Touarik, of the 
 tribe of the Avelimmiden, has his residence ; then the villages Te'nkii, Terzarui, 
 where is the residence of the Thobeli of the name of Untilkin, Anehuni, 
 Kadc'nbii, Tennehu, then a more considerable place called She'lbi, which has its 
 Sultan by name Abulu, then the large place Tobeli, which likewise has its own 
 Sultan, named Masari. [Tobeli, in the itinerary of the route from Agadcz to 
 Sakatu, is mentioned as a place belonging to Adar.] Next follows another 
 village called Fe'rriji, which has its own Sultan, el Hussen Ajillema ; then a place 
 called Fadie, a village called Mararti/Y, and a place called Ladhn manor Ela- 
 de'mmau, where the brother of Abd-el-Kadir, the Sultan of Agadez, whose name 
 is Ittegama, is living; then a village called Tenfafi, and another called //f{/i:'(/- 
 dua, and a place called Niiba, and another called Giru, and another called Termi, 
 and a village called Kernufllam, and another called Mezdgyi, and a village called 
 Ze'rdra. These are the villages and towns belonging to Gober. 
 
 13th day of your journey from Agadez to Maradeh. Having started from 
 Avelimmiden as general- at sunrise, you arrive about the Aser in Ladcfmmu, the 
 above mentioned village. 
 
 14th. Gudunnifznd, a village, where you arrive about one o'clock. 
 
 15th. Ahenii, a village, where you arrive at the Aser. 
 
 16th. And the next three days you travel over the Hammada, until on the 
 
 19th. You arrive at the end of your journey, the large town called Amrddeh, 
 generally called Maradeh, which is under the authority of the Sultan ofKashnah, at 
 least nominally. In going from Marddeh to Tdsaivu, a journey of two days, you 
 pass the village called Teberi. 
 
 IV. 
 
 Route from Agadez to Blbuah, according to the Emghedesie, Eheii. 
 
 1st day. You start in general in the evening and sleep the first night at about 
 half au hour's distance from the town, in the valley called Efi'ggC Eutdr'cU'mmet. 
 
 * The former capital of Gober, as I learned afterwards, was called Gauiingazo, 
 which was destroyed by the Sultan of Maradeh, not by the Fellanis. The name 
 of the new town is Teberi.
 
 30 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 2n(l. Tintabdrak, a valley with water, where you arrive at the Aser, after having 
 passed early in the morning the valley called Ainelu'li. 
 
 3rd. Bin^bhu, a valley with diim-trees, where you arrive a little before sunset. 
 In the morning you keep for a while along the valley of Tintiiburak, after which 
 your way lies over the rocks, passing through three different valleys before you 
 arrive at the valley called Binebbuu, viz., Emuller, Arutiih, and the Wadi called 
 Amdcgeru. 
 
 4th. TCiidaucn, a valley with water, where you arrive about one p.m. 
 
 5th. Atez^rket, after the Aser. All rocky ground. 
 
 6th. About Aser you encamp on the Haramada, consisting of pebbles. 
 
 7th. About the same time you encamp on a spot among the rocks, called Tazel. 
 
 8th. About sunset dismount on a spot between the rocks, called Efigayen. 
 
 9th. About two hours after sunset encamp between the rocks on a spot called 
 D^hradu Ezilkker, from whence you start after a short rest. 
 
 loth. And the four following days you travel night and day over the Hammada, 
 where there are neither trees nor stones and scarcely any hashish, after which you 
 arrive in the night of the 
 
 15th. At the village called Fdshi, where there are plenty of dates and two 
 castles, one of which is in ruins, while the other is in good repair. 
 
 IGth. About two hours after sunset you encamp on the Hammada, when, after 
 two or threejhours' repose, you start again and continue the whole of 
 
 17th. When, after having dismounted and started again at the same time as the 
 day before, you arrive in the evening at Bilmah, where, as well as in Kauwar, which 
 is near to it, there are plenty of palm trees and of salt. The inhabitants of these 
 places, as well as those of Fashi, are the Beraunis, as the Tibbuss are called 
 by the people of Air. 
 
 Moute from Agddez to Tuwdt, according to the learned Tuwdti, Abd- Allah. 
 
 1st day. You start in the afternoon and encamp the first night near the village 
 called Elkhasds, in the fertile valley of the same name, distant from Agadez about 
 three hours or a little more. 
 
 2nd. Tclowa, a valley, where you arrive about the Aser, after having passed on 
 your road several valleys, separated, as is always the case in Air, by more or less 
 elevated rocky ground. Early in the morning you cross the Wadi called Azal, 
 then that called Tufatekin ; after which you pass about noon the celebrated valley, 
 by name Aerinallera, after which, before you arrive at Telowa, there is still another 
 Wadi to cross, which is called Iserseren. 
 
 3rd. Uklef, a valley, where there is water as well as in Telowa. This day you 
 cross but one Wadi, called Asa, after which your road passes over a stony ground 
 called Tinin, covered with pebbles. Arrive in the valley of Uklef at the time of 
 the Aser. 
 
 4th. Makdm el Sheikh ben 'Abd el Kerime, a sort of mosque, generally known 
 under the name of Msid SidiBagdadi. You arrive at this place about an hour 
 before sunset, after having rested during the greatest heat near Auderas. In the 
 morning your road passes for some time along the Wadi Uklef. 
 
 5th. Tiygedah, a valley with a deep well, where you arrive at the time of the 
 Aser, after having passed in the morning the valley called Er'arar'r(fn — [the more 
 accurate name of this Wadi is Er'iir'ar n' Di-ndemu] — and after having crossed a 
 small mountain ridge, keeping along the Wadi Asadah, from which the Wadi 
 Tiggedah is separated by rocky ground of small elevation. 
 
 6th. Encamp about sunset on rocky ground. Pass in the morning the valley 
 called Tefarroct, then cross for some hours gravelly ground, with few large white 
 projecting stones, after which you descend into the valley called Agaten, where, 
 near to a well, you pass the hours of the greatest heat. 
 
 7th. 7eHS(/"^arrive before the Aser, 
 
 8th. Iferwdn, one of the finest valleys of Air, with a village of the same name, 
 and plenty of date-trees bearing excellent fruit. Arrive at sunset, after having 
 passed a number of small valleys called Ar'itam.
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 31 
 
 9th, Tidik. a valley, with a village of the same name, where you arrive before 
 the Aser, after having passed the well called Neggaru. 
 
 10th. Siif mellel, a locality in the gravelly ground, over which your route lies 
 to-day. Encamp at the time of the Aser. 
 
 11th. Zelil, an inhabited spot, where you arrive about one p.m., after having 
 passed a Wadi called Agelendi, Fade, and Meratha. 
 
 12th. IJi Nemakheder, called by others Efinebakka, where you arrive at sunset, 
 after having marched the whole day over a pebbly plain, called (by the Arabs) 
 Shaebet el Ahir. 
 
 13th. You encamp on the Hammada after having crossed a rocky ground full 
 of pebbles, and having passed a Wadi called Tiiiten. On the spot where you 
 encamp you find a little hashish. 
 
 14th. \ou encamp, at one p.m., on a spot where there is the herbage called el 
 hadu, after having crossed a stony g^'ound called by the people Timazgaren. 
 
 15th. Nesiva, a well not far to the W. of Asiii, where you arrive after the Aser, 
 after having passed a valley called Tafsastau. 
 
 16th. Terdf, a locality on the Hammdda, where you encamp at the Aser. 
 
 1 7th, Tinterdnhe, a Wadi with a famous cavern called Aa'gidet en Nib, where 
 you arrive at the Aser, proceeding always on the Hammiida. 
 
 18th. Encamp at sunset between sandhills called el 'Ark. 
 
 19th. Tagere'ra, a Wadi, where you arrive about one p.m., after having entered 
 a mountainous tract called Aghil. 
 
 20th. JSl Ar'sill, a valley with water, where you arrive a little after noon, after 
 having crossed a rough ground called Esfa mellesa. 
 
 21st. Te'kderen, a Wadi, where you arrive after the Aser. 
 
 22nd. Erarar'e'n, a Wadi, where you arrive at the time of the Aser, after having 
 crossed a stony ground full of pebbles. 
 
 23rd. Zerzer, a Wadi with water — arrival at the Aser, after having passed a 
 ground full of pebbles. 
 
 24th. Ifaek, a Wadi — arrival at Aser — ground the same. 
 
 25th. Wade el Inikdm, where you arrive about one o'clock p.m. Pebbles, 
 
 26th, Agnar, a plain enclosed by ridges — arrive at the Aser, after having kept 
 first along the Wadi el Imkam, which leads into another Wadi called Temar'r'aset, 
 from which you enter the plain, 
 
 27th. Turar'en, a Wadi where you encamp about the Aser, after having crossed 
 another Wad! called Utiil, into which you descend from the gravelly soil, 
 
 28th. Tilak, a Wadi, where you arrive after the Aser, having crossed another 
 Wadi called Eher'i. 
 
 29th. Temdssan^ggeti — arrive at the Aser, having passed through another 
 Wadi, Tenar'rakeli. 
 
 30th. Enne'mmegel, a Wadi, where you encamp at sunset, the valley being rich 
 in trees. To-day you have to pass two other valleys called Wadi Eresnuron and 
 Tintaheli, — all these valleys being separated by an Hammada of an even surface 
 without stones. 
 
 31st. Tehdrrdket, a Wadi commanded by a mountain called Turaeret, where 
 you arrive about the Aser, Pebbles and stones. In Teharrflket you change your 
 direction, the road turning here more to the N, on account of the mountainous 
 tract to your right, 
 
 32nd, Hdggara, a Wadi with a well called Tehelehohet, where you arrive after 
 the Aser, . 
 
 33rd. Suf mallei, another locality of the same name as that above mentioned, 
 where you arrive about the Aser, after having passed two Wadis, of which the 
 first is called Akdhau and the other Emmujiij. 
 
 34th. Sheikh Salah, with the surname Mela el akhsen, near to whose chapel, 
 situated in the mountainous tract culled Ttseunu, there is water. You arrive a 
 little before sunset, Hammada, 
 
 35th, Ter'dzzert, a little before sunset. Hammada. 
 
 36th, Emmesir, a Wadi, where you encamp after the Aser. In the morning you 
 keep along a Wadi called Meniet, where there is a well, after which you pass 
 another Wadi called Afisfes, while the last part of your road leads over the 
 Hammada, consisting of gravel. 
 
 37th, Etgiilgulet, where you arrive at the time of the Aser. In the morning for
 
 32 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 a while yovi keep along the Wadi Emmesir till yon reach that called Ardk, and, 
 following it up, you pass two water-places, Sokiyah, and farther on one called El 
 Hajar. 
 
 38th. Tdjemut, a Wadi, where you encamp before the Aser. 
 
 3'Jth. Koikoiut, a group of small valleys, where you encamp at one p.m. 
 
 40th. Giirdi, a Wadi", where you arrive a little before sunset, after having 
 passed another Wadi called Terattiuiin, where there is water. 
 
 41st. The well in the long Wadi A(jmem(ir, which is reached about Aser. 
 
 42nd. Encamp about the same time in the same valley of Agmemdr. 
 
 43rd. Ensemith, where you arrive after the Aser. In the morning you still keep 
 along the large valley of Agmemtir, until jou ascend a mountain ; from which you 
 descend into another valley called Elbuttah, where there is a well called Tin e' Sli- 
 man, proceeding along which valley you reach the place of your encampment. 
 
 44th. El U'uhah— you arrive at Aser after having passed on your road a depression 
 called El Sha'db, from which you have to ascend the higher ground to a forest of 
 great extent and full of brushwood. 
 
 45th. Insulah — about Aser ; first keeping in the forest, then ascending a little. 
 On or near the road from Asiii or Nesua to Tuwut are found tlie follotviny tribes: — 
 
 First, the Imrdth or Meratah, a very interesting and widely dispersed tribe. Next 
 come the Sakomdren, a tribe very friendly to the Tuwatis, living to the N. of the 
 road. Then the Tuwdh reg Tcitdk, the Kehiheiiut, the Ijrdii, a separate section of 
 the Imrath, who drink from the water in Wadi Tajemut. To the N. of these, 
 living near and within the boundaries of Tuwat, are the KcUmellcl, or, as they 
 are likewise called, the Auelad Fakki, and, closely connected with them, the 
 Tegdnsdkkel. Besides these two tribes of the Tuwjtrik there is in Tuwjit another 
 tribe called Tiggehingdli.* 
 
 VI. 
 
 Rmxte from Agddez to MahntJt, according to the ICelferudn, Bainah, nnd 
 continued as Jar as Timbuktu, according to tlie account of A bd- Allah. 
 
 This road is not at present a caravan- road, but merely a path taken every year 
 by the Razzias of the Kelferwaiv, in order to plunder the caravans on their road 
 from Tuwat to Timbuktu, and it serves also for the encampments of the Avelim- 
 miden. Bainah went this road 20 times. 
 
 1st day. Enudij</ed, a W^adi, where you arrive at the Aser, after having started 
 from Agddez in the morning. 
 
 2nd. Iminte'dent, where you arrive at the same time (Aser), crossing many de- 
 pressions in the rocky ground. 
 
 3rd. Sake'ret, a Wadi, where you arrive at sunset. 
 
 4th. Etmet Tade'rret, a Wadi, where you arrive two hours after sunset. 
 
 5th. Ayr^dem, about Aser. The whole day's journey lies over a Hammada of 
 red soil. 
 
 6th. Elsd Nelimdn, at Aser. Hamniada. 
 
 7th. Ti'mmia, at Aser. Hammada. 
 
 8th. Ehcldrlar'^n, about the same time. Hammada. 
 
 9th. Isnheri'en, about the same time. The Hammdda is here covered with a 
 little hashish. Here you change your direction, the road turning more north- 
 ward. 
 
 10th. Etsa Enhe'bbi, about the Aser. 
 
 11th. Igcdidn, about 1 P.M. 
 
 12th. Alidr, about Aser. 
 
 13th. Kelijil, a little after noon. 
 
 14th. Akalii, a considerable valley with water, which you rench at 1 o'clock. 
 
 15th. Akenr, an inhabited valley, where you arrive about the Aser, having 
 walked the whole day till after noon in Wadi Akal6. 
 
 * This itinerary, of which 1 have a continuation, containing the whole route 
 from Insdlah as far as Usthen Tuwdt, is far more accurate than the one which 1 
 sent some time ago to London, written according to information I obtained from 
 another Tuwati, of the nameof Abd-el-Kadir.
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 33 
 
 IGth. Kiddl, after the Aser. 
 
 17th. Timdklali., about Aser. 
 
 18th. AsaUlr, at sunset, after having crossed several depressions in the rocky 
 ground. Here you find inhabitants/partly Arabs of the tribe of the Kintah, partl^ 
 Touarik of the widely dispersed tribe of the Ifogas. 
 
 19th. Ar'sher, a fine valley, with date trees, corn, and tobacco; and the inhabit- 
 ants have another valley, called Tesilllte, likewise rich in dates. 
 
 20th; Tifaufaue'n, about the Aser. 
 . 21st. Hallet el Sheikh Sidi el Mukhtdr, at which place of worship you arrive 
 about 1 P.M. 
 
 22nd. Encamp at the Aser, on pebbly ground, all the pebbles being of white 
 colour, between which a little hashish is growing. 
 
 23d. Mabrick, at sunset. The Sheikh of this small town is called Mili. 
 
 From Mabruk to Timbuktu. 
 
 1st day. Encamp on pebbly ground at sunset. On your right hand, towards the 
 sea, you pass during the whole day sandhills, called Dhahar el hamdr, or the back 
 of the donkey. 
 
 2nd. 'Arg after the Aser, having still the sandhills on your right hand. 
 
 3rd. Muniun, a place with a castle recently built, to the S. of which is the 
 well. 
 
 4th. Tebiigai, two hours after sunset, after having made your day's journey 
 through sand, between which hashish grows. 
 
 5th. Bii-Jehaehah, a village with a very high tower, where you arrive at sunset. 
 
 6th. Essebaeseb, a little after sunset. 
 
 7th. Encamp among pebbles and sand about Aser. 
 
 8th. Aii^ldd Hauele, a Wadi, where you arrive at sunset. 
 
 9th. Te'ddemdhhet, Wad I, after sunset. 
 
 10th. Aberdz, a spot with plenty of hashish, where you arrive at the Aser. 
 From hence you have a view of the town of Timbuktu, where you arrive 
 
 11th. Early in the morning. Timbuktu is a large place, the first inhabitants of 
 which were the Welah, of the name e'Eumah. In course of time the Fulan entered 
 the town, the Rumah remaining under their authority. The place is at present 
 quiet, and there are no disturbances made by the Touarik. The chief of the 
 Fulan is called Mohammed Lebbu. The standard of the market of Timbuktu 
 is gold, cowries, and salt. The Touarik of the neighbourhood belong to the tribe 
 of T(5ddemiikket, but there is another tribe in the town of the name of Sigo. There 
 are many merchants from Saheleh, Fiis, and Ghadamis. 
 
 VII. 
 
 Route from Tm-Tellitst to Agddez.* 
 
 TIn-Tellust, the residence of the Sheikh El Niir, and one of the most important 
 places in the country of Air or Asben, is situated at the bend of a large valley, 
 which, gathering all the smaller water-courses from the right and left, is here 
 forced by a large mountain-chain, stretching almost E. and \V., to change its 
 direction from the S.E. and N.VV. to tlie W. This valley, although one of the 
 most considerable in tlie country, is not rich in herbage, and cannot alone support 
 the inhabitants scattered about in many small villages, or maintain the influence of 
 the Sheikh. The portion called Tin-Tcgganah, where we encamped, forms the 
 pasture grounds for the Sheikh's camels and flocks. Though some of the trees, 
 particularly the Talhah, rise in this part of the country to a size unknown in other 
 parts of the Desert, still no idea can be formed of that profusion of vegetation 
 which enlivens the valleys along the southern part of the road to Agilddz. 
 
 Generally speaking the whole of Asben consists of a labyrinth of valleys, 
 separated from each other by more or less elevated rocky ground, overtowered by 
 imposing groups of mountains, rising to a height of from 20U0 to ;5()00 feet, or even 
 more — the whole, with its bushes and clusters of trees, forming the " dawuh " or 
 wilderness, in contradistinction to the " dayi" or naked desert. The first part of the 
 
 * See Map —Ed.
 
 34 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 road from Tin-Tellust to Ag-lddz, the general direction of which is S.S.W., while 
 that of the valleys is from S.S.E. to N.N.W., passes principally over rocky ground. 
 To the 8. of Tiu-Tellust, at the distance of about 13 geographical miles, and 
 stretching almost W. and E. along the northern side of the road, rises another 
 consideiahle mountain called Bondaijeh, which separates the road to Agi'idez from 
 that to Damergu and Ziiider, and gives to the latter at its commencement a 
 strong deviation to the E. (its general direction seeming to be nearly S.) ; and to 
 the southward of the Bondayeh, separated from it by a very uneven, rocky ground, 
 are the two largest mountain ranges of the whole country, viz., the Eijhellul 
 (EkelliU), running N.N.W. andS.S.E., and the Baghzen (Baktsen), the direction of 
 which seems to be from N.E. to S.W. The road, passing far from the Baghzen, 
 almost touches the western foot of the northern part of the Eghellal, while on its 
 Avesteru side it is bounded by elevations of less dimension, but of more varified 
 shape, particulai'ly the Tshereha (CheriJka), a magnificent bifurcated mount, the two 
 summits of which, separated from each other almost to the foot, rise like sugarloaves 
 close together to nearly the same height. 
 
 After having followed the broad but almost naked valley of Tin-Tellust for 
 about a mile and a half, and having crossed an important portion of it, coming 
 from S.E., the road ascends the elevated rocky ground, where it proceeds in a 
 zigzag direction, giving tlie traveller a view of the mountains round him at every 
 moment in different groups and from different sides. The valley of Eijhelloua 
 (Ekellowa), running from about S.S.E. to N.N.W. , is the first which is crossed. 
 On our journey to Agddez there were plenty of wells full of water at I5 feet depth, 
 while only a month later on our return we found them all dry. This also was the 
 case in most of the valleys, the people being apparently too idle to dig to any depth. 
 The valley of Eghelloua does not seem rich in vegetation, being little more than 
 a broad channel for the waters in the rainy season, and it is greatly surpassed by 
 the Tegarrdresa, which, receiving a great many streams, particularly from the 
 Bondayeh, presents a charming view of fresh herbage and fine trees. It supports 
 a small village of the same name, situated at the juncture of a considerable branch 
 with the principal valley, the direction of which is here almost E. and W. At 
 some distance from the village we were obliged to stop, in order to hire two more 
 camels for myself and servant, there being no camels to be had at Tiu-Tellust, on 
 account of the installation of the new Sultan and the projected Kazzia (Ghaziyah). 
 My own fine Meheri had been carried away by the Eifedeyeh. On our return we 
 passed a little more to the W., thus avoiding the easterly deviation of the valley. 
 
 After having left this fine valley the road again ascends the rocky ground, first to 
 the W . on account of the lower ridges of the Bondayeh ; farther on, towards the S., 
 making straight up to the western descent of the Eghellal (Ekelhll), at the northern 
 base of which, at about 28 miles distance from Tin-Tellust, there is a very rich 
 valley, which, from a neighbouring village of that name, lying a little to the E., is 
 called Tshizdlcii (Chitsoleu). This valley being inclosed to the E. on both sides 
 by spurs of the higher mountains, opens to the W. into a considerable low plain, 
 thickly covered with trees and hashish,* while to the S. the steep sides of the 
 Eghelldl rise and bound the landscape, the lower ridges to the W. being overtopped 
 by the curiously shaped summit of the Tsherdka, whose two peaks are seen from 
 this in one line. In this fine valley we breakfasted on our going to Agildez, and 
 passed the last night on our return. I was anxious to visit the formerly so im- 
 portant place of Asodi (known in Europe<is Asiiti), by which it was understood 
 our road should pass ; but I could not induce my companion Hamma, under whose 
 personal protection I was travelling, to deviate that short distance to the W. without 
 the payment of an extra sum, which, from our limited means, was quite impossible. 
 
 The WadI Tshizulen seems to be the last of the larger valleys, which, in coming 
 from the N., run E. and W. ; from hence almost all the valleys extend from S. to 
 N., which is equally the case with the larger mountain chains, viz., the Eghelld.1, 
 the Baghzen, the mountain range from which rises the majestic cone of the Dogem, 
 the Alieela (Abilah), ;ni(l almost all the other ranges, so that henceforward the 
 road to Agadez traverses cither fine valleys, some of them of great length, or 
 defiles and mountain passes. 
 
 * Hashish, or rather Ilashishah, signifies Herb in Arabic, and is applied to 
 various plants. — K.
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 35 
 
 For the first 3? miles after having left the valley of Tshizdlen our road passed 
 at a little distance from the western declivity of the northern part of the mountain 
 of Eghelhil, which here rises abruptly to the height of about 2000 feet, while to 
 the right lower ridges of rocks stretch along in a parallel direction, sometimes 
 overlooked by the higher tops of the more distant mountains. From this rocky 
 ground we descended into a tine valley by the bed of a rivulet, lying almost N. and 
 S., leaving which by an almost imperceptible descent to the right we entered the 
 large and irregularly inclosed valley of Eghellal, of which the former seems to be 
 a branch. 
 
 Shortly after entering this valley the country becomes more open, and while you 
 distinguish the smaller I'ocky mountains to the right of the Tshereka down to the 
 Agatha and Belasega, to the S.E. you suddenly obtain a view of the long chain of 
 the Baghzen, appearing behind the majestic Eghellal. With the Baghzen I was 
 disappointed ; for, instead of the towering peak which I had expected, this famous 
 mountain from the distance wore the appearance of a long and not very lofty chain, 
 stretching from N. to S.S.W. in an almost uninterrupted line. It continued to 
 present the same outline during the whole of the next day's journey. The second 
 night of our journey to Agadez we slept without a tent at some distance from the 
 well of Eghellal, in the flat bottom of the valley, after having travelled 23 miles, 
 while on our return we stopped but a few minutes at the well to water. The 
 country at the foot of the Baghzen, by the road of Afasas, is said to be rich in 
 herbage, forming the pasture grounds of the Ke'1-baghzen and the Kel-en-neggaru, 
 while some more favoured spots, like the valley of Tshimmia, produce date-trees. 
 
 The next day's journey from the well of Eghellal (at the distance of about 2 
 miles from which to the S.E. there is a village of the same name) differed much 
 from all I had before seen in the country of Asben. Instead of narrow valleys or 
 open deserts, a pleasant open country stretched out before us to the S.E. as far as 
 the long range of the Baghzen, uninterrupted only by low ridges of rocks or a few 
 isolated cones. The road itself passed first along tlft valley of Eghellal, when, 
 after this valley turned to the W., and to the S. of the mountain of Agatha, with 
 the village of the same name, it crossed a plain, which is by low narrow ridges 
 divided into several smaller basins, with a few dry water-courses running from 
 E. to W. The view became rather more confined upon our crossing, at 7 miles 
 distance from the well, the winding bed of a large winter stream, inclosed between 
 two ridges running from S.W. to N.E. While the country to the left remained 
 open, to the right a less regularly formed mountain chain approached from the 
 N.N.W., where it almost joins the singularly-shaped mountain of Beldsegah, with 
 its three summits. The two outer ones are broad and almost flat, while that in the 
 centre tapers into a point. 
 
 At 11 J miles from the well, after passing through a small mountain defile, the 
 country assumed another aspect. It seems to be suddenly cut in two by a wide 
 chasm stretching from E.S.E. to W.N.W. ; and while to the E. it is divided by a 
 low cliff of rocks into two branches, towards the W. it opens into a wide regular 
 level, bounded to the N. by the irregular mountains just passed. To the S. the 
 northern side of the majestic Abecla forms the steep barrier of the plain, which 
 stretches out towards the W. as far as the eye can reach, uninterrupted only by a 
 few low ridges and one isolated cone. The Abeela sends forth at its eastern side 
 several nearly isolated cones of peculiar shape, giving a peculiar character to this 
 district, as all the cones from the Tshertka southward as far as the southern 
 end of the Abeela, all lie in the same line. The direction of this wide valley 
 between the Abeela and the mountain to the N. is E. and W., while, after passing 
 the second large watercourse, the way passes almost entirely along fine valleys, 
 running from S. to N. with the exception of the Wadi Auderas. The first of these 
 valleys is the beautiful Wadi Tigyedah, inclosed to the W. by the abrupt side of 
 the Abeela, from which towards the S. several lofty cones project, while on the E. 
 it is bounded by a lower semicircular chain, and joins the Wadi Abeela. 
 
 Tiggedah formed a transition from the poorer to the richer valleys of this country, 
 for though there are no diim trees (goreba), still other trees and bushes, viz., the 
 talha, the addua, the gaw, the sowak, and the krunka, abound, and here alone, at 
 the sides of the water-channels, I saw grass as fresh and green as in Europe, and 
 quite charming to the eyes. In this beautiful spot we encamped on our journey 
 to Agildcz after the third day's journey. But this valley, which at that time, with 
 
 d2
 
 36 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 the exception of the cooing of wild doves and the cry of a solitary antelope, seemed 
 to be uninhabited and almost lifeless, was, upon our return, full of flocks and herds. 
 We met here also a large salt-caravan, and a string of youiigi camels bound to 
 Agildez. The Kjcl-en-neggaru, to whom -this valley belongs, lead a nomadic life, 
 going about from one valley to another, and never settling in one spot for a long 
 while. They have here a small mosque built of stones, and covered with the 
 trunks of the palm-tree. 
 
 A short interval of rocky ground, rising to little more than 100 feet, separates 
 the valley of Tiggedah from the still more luxuriant one of AsadaJi, which, after 
 having run from S.S.W. to N.N.K., here changes its direction, turning at the southern 
 side of the Abeela to the W. After we had travelled about 2^ miles in this fine 
 AVadi, we met a considerable slave caravan, and I also saw the first palm-tree 
 since I had left Selufiet. The vegetation of this valley was so luxuriant, and the 
 path was so sliut up by branches, that my servant was once carried oti' his camel. 
 The valley a little farther on winds between the approaching ridges, which to the 
 E. form a glen, in which there is a village not visible from the valley. As we 
 ascended one branch of the valley, over the lower ridges to the left, covei'cd with 
 greensward up to the top, I obtained the first view of the broad summit of the 
 Dor/em, which, rising majestically above the mountain chain, appears to be the 
 highest in Air. I am sure that I am not wrong in estimating the height of this 
 mountain at from 4000 to 5000 feet, while I think that the Eghelldl and the Baghzen 
 scarcely reach from 3000 to 3500 feet. 
 
 A short descent brought us through tlie rugged defile into the plain of Erdier n 
 D^iidemu, covered with brushwood and small talhah trees, to the great annoyance of 
 the traveller. This district is thickly inhabited by lions (" zaki," or " abu u dawa," 
 the animal of the wilderness) ; we ourselves met with several, and saw the footsteps 
 of many more, while a species of ape (beri) about the size of a small boy is seen in 
 crowds on the lower ridges, from which they descend into the valleys. Of these 
 we saw several with their young on their back. In this forest of talhah trees we 
 travelled along for 3^ miles, when we quitted the plain, which stretched much 
 further to the S.S.W. on its E. side, by a glen leading towards the majestic moun- 
 tains in front, but soon turning again to the S. we passed along several narrow flats, 
 where, on our way to Agadez, on the 7th of October, we were drenched in the 
 last thunder-storm of the rainy season. "We then entered a rocky plain, which on 
 its nortliern side bends towards the E., where, over the lower extremity of the 
 mountain of Auderas, a higher summit towers, while, on its southern half, the 
 plain becomes more regularly inclosed on both sides by considerable groups of 
 mountains. These ranges are entirely separated from each other, and bear the 
 general name of mountains of Auderas. The plain of Tar'ist is famous among the 
 Arabs as well as the Kelowis, on account of the remains of a mosque, denoted only 
 by lines of stones on the ground, of a great Saint called Sidi Baghdiidi, the general 
 resting place of the caravans. The basaltic formation has here supplanted the 
 granitic. The whole plain is covered with loose stones, about the size of a child's 
 head, of black basaltic rock, and I think it probable that a part of the mountains 
 around consists of the same. The basaltic formation is most evident in a deep 
 fissure in the plain, the surface of which, level in the northern half, becomes 
 more rugged to the S. of the fissure, while it is covered with herbage almost all 
 over. Here you are on about the same level as that of the llammiidah, on which 
 Agadez is situated, and a distant prospect opens before you, the country seeming 
 to be one rugged desert, out of which a few isolated cones rise. This circum- 
 stance makes me believe that the people are right when they say that Auderas 
 is visible from the summit of the Mesi'illajeh. 
 
 By a northern branch of the Wadi Auderas you descend from this rough ground 
 and enter the narrow but rich valley which, thickly overgrown with palm trees 
 along the sides of the broad watercourse, winds through tliis mountainous district. 
 It takes its origin from the Baghzen itself, where the living sources of water are 
 said to be. At the foot of one of the two villages in this valley, Aerwcfn-u-a-n- 
 Tidrak, we encamped on the fourth night of our journey to Agadez, after a marcli 
 of about 23 miles. The other village, called Ifarg'e'n, is situated higher up the 
 valley on the road from Auderas to Damergu. On our return we stopped but a 
 few minutes at the well in order to fill our waterskins, when I had just time enough 
 to make a sketch of this picturesque spot. On our return likewise, on descending
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 37 
 
 from the rocky grouud into the valley, I saw a barbarous method of tillage, — three 
 slaves being yoked to a sort of plough aud driven like oxen by their master. 
 This is probably the southernmost place in Central Africa where the plough is used. 
 1 was assured that neither in Haussa nor in Sudan do the people make use of it, 
 the hoe (fe'rtafiua) being the only instrument used for preparing the ground. The 
 valley of Audcras, as well as the succeeding valleys on the road to Agadez, are 
 capable of producing not only ghussub, but corn, wine, and dates, as well as almost 
 every species of vegetables ; and there are said still to exist about 50 gardens (g6ua, 
 pi. gdnakee) near the village of Ifarg'e'n, higher up the valley. At present these 
 fine valleys are left almost entirely uncultivated, and instead of seeing useful pro- 
 duce the traveller has no little difficulty in making his way through a luxuriant but 
 wild and useless vegetation. These valleys are inhabited by the Imrdd (generally 
 but less acciyately written Imrdth). 
 
 On leaving Auderas we took a more easterly road than the common one, which, 
 after having crossed very rugged ground for about 12 or 15 miles, keeps along the 
 fine deep Wadi Tellwa for about 10 miles, and then ascending for about an hour, 
 reaches Agadez in three hours more. Our route, after having crossed 12 miles of 
 rocky but rather level ground, and having passed' a spot where a little trona, or 
 natron, is obtained, brought us to the long Wadi Buddeh, which we followed up for 
 about 13 miles, when we encamped in an open plain, where the valley turns to 
 the E., near a cemetery belonging to the inhabitants of a small village called 
 Tawar Niiaijvid. On this evening, the 8th of October, at about half-past eight 
 o'clock we heard a great noise to the N.E., which I supposed to be an avalanche, 
 until, after my return from Agadez, I learnt from my colleagues that they had 
 seen a splendid meteor about the same time. In this valley a prickly plant, 
 called " kareugia," is a real torment for the traveller ; and, besides other trees 
 and bushes known to me before, I saw great numbers of a plant I'csembliug ivy, 
 and called "griffenee," the fruit of which, being just ripe, was about 1^ inch in 
 length, and less than 1 inch in thickness. It is of a red colour, has a sweet but 
 rather insipid taste, aud is much relished by the people of the country. On our 
 return journey, near this spot, we pursued a party of five lions, which we had 
 observed to the right, till they made their escape behind the ridges which stretch 
 along the eastern side of the valley in its upper course. The lion of Asben is not 
 equal in courage to that of Barbary. 
 
 Your course from Wadi Buddeh to the Wadi Tefdrrahad passes a chain of 
 hills bounding the upper part of the valley Buddeh on the S., and inclining to 
 the E., after which you pass for a few miles over rocky ground of no great 
 elevation. Wadi Tef'arrakad is perhaps still richer than the former, the water- 
 channel here being divided into several branches, so that the water spreads the 
 luxuriant vegetation to a greater breadth ; but the road does not keep along this 
 valley the same distance, the watercourse turning more to the E., and after 3 miles 
 making a very considerable bend in this direction, while the road crosses some 
 rocky ground for 3 miles further. Here we met a small caravan of four persons 
 representing four different modes of traveinng in this country, one being mounted 
 on a camel, another on a buffalo, the third rode a donkey, and the fourth made use 
 of his own legs. Having crossed the Wadi, which here turns to the E., once more, 
 we took a westerly direction, over uneven, rocky ground, from which rise two iso- 
 lated cones, one of them visible to a great distance — for 4^ miles, when we 
 descended into another valley, of the same richness of vegetation, but of greater 
 breadth and length. This is the Wadi Bar' el (Boghel), where I was agreeably 
 surprised in finding at least a small ghussub field, which had been cultivated last 
 year, showing what these valleys might be, and proliably once have been. There 
 was no well near it, though water may be found everywhere in these valleys, but 
 not at the same depth. The ground was covered in many spots by a sort of wild 
 melon, " jan giinnah ;" and in the thick foliage of the trees the guinea-hen, or 
 " zabu," was cackling. At the end of this valley, where it opens into a handsome 
 basin, the watercourse keeping henceforward more to the W., while the road turns 
 to the E., on our return journey, I first saw the tree called " baure." Though I 
 was told that in Ilaussa, where it is common, it reaches a much greater size, 
 I still felt great satisfaction, after my journey through the desert, in looking at a 
 tree whose trunk, at the height of eight feet from the ground, measured not less 
 than twenty-six feet in circumference, ending with a thick, beautifully shaped
 
 38 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 crown, at a height of about eighty feet. At this place a travelling companion and 
 friend of mine left, on his return to Afasas, where I should have liked very much to 
 accompany him ; but all my efforts to persuade Hamma to take this road, as he 
 had promised to do, were in vain, too much time having already been spent in 
 Agiidez, while he was obliged to arrive in Ti'n-Tellust before the setting out of the 
 sait-caravau on its way to 13ilmah. There are from 05 to 70 miles from this spot 
 to Afasas. 
 
 On our return we encamped in this fine valley, where the road leaves it ; but on 
 our journey to Agddez we passed the last night near its entrance, where it widens 
 into a sort of irregularly enclosed rich basin, called Tamin Tiingaiden. Here, 
 on the W. side of the valley, the last hills rise, which overlook the surface of the 
 Hammuda. We ascended these early in the morning of the 10th of October, when 
 I was agreeably surprised to find this pebbly plain, which, according to the accounts 
 I had received, I fancied to be a terrible waste, ti-aversed by many large valleys, 
 full of trees and herbage. Having passed almost the whole day in one of these 
 valleys, partly on account of the Kelgen's and IteSc4n, who were just removing their 
 large' camp from near the town, where they had conducted the new Sultan, partly 
 because it is the custom in this country never to enter a place by daylight, we 
 made our entrance into Agdddz about an hour after sunset. 
 
 Tin-Tellust. Miles. 
 
 Wadl Ekellowah. 
 
 1st day. Chitsdlen . . 28 . . October 4 
 
 2nd „ Ekellill . . 23 . . „ 5 
 
 3rd „ Tiggedah . . 23 . . „ 6 
 
 4th „ Aerw^n-wa-n-Tidrak 23 . . ,.7 
 
 5th „ Wadi Biiddeh . . 25 . . „ 8 
 
 6th „ Bughel . . 23 . . „ 9 
 
 7th „ Agdd^z .... 3 , . „ 10 
 
 148 
 
 VIII. 
 
 Account of the Tawarik or Tuaryg Tribes. 
 
 In this account of the Tuaryg I shall not go back to remote times, or make inquiries 
 concerning the origin or the history of this people, but shall restrict myself to a 
 description of the various large families of the Tiiarygs as they at present exist in 
 their different sections. The only historical point of view which I may venture to 
 take, and which is quite indispensable in order to form a judgment on the real 
 state of things among the different tribes, is, that I shall notice, as far as possible, 
 the conditions under which they have settled in the various parts of the so-called 
 Great Desert, or Salir;!. 
 
 This desert is at present known to be not, as had long been supposed, a sandy 
 ocean without vegetation, and unfit for organized beings, but rather a rocky wil- 
 derness, sometimes indeed stretching out into an almost uninterrupted level, covered 
 with pebbles or with gravel, but as often undulated with ridges and valleys, cer- 
 tainly not bountifully endowed by nature, but nevertheless furnished with vegeta- 
 tion enough to provide for the camel, that useful animal, which, in the Targi'e or 
 the Teniiibirg tongue, has been most expressively combined with man into one idea, 
 man being called alis, and the camel amis. Indeed, except in some favoured 
 spots, where the date-tree grows, and where com or ghussub and vegetables can be 
 obtained (of which there are some localities, " Wahs or Oases," in the very heart of 
 the Desert), man docs not find in these districts adequate food for himself, and the 
 tribes are obliged to fetch their provisions from markets situated on the borders of 
 their spacious abode. The means for buying these they obtain either by robbery 
 or from the tribute paid to them for the protection they give to caravans passing 
 the difficult paths of the Desert, or from the hire they get for their camels, or from 
 trade which they carry on themsL-lves, and, finally, from the salt, which nature has 
 deposited in immense quantities in different parts of the Desert, the most knowp of 
 which are Bilmah and Di'rkee on the one, and Tandcnni on the other side. 
 
 Such being the character of the Desert, it is scarcely probable that it was unin-
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 39 
 
 habited before the arrival of the now ruling tribes of the Tdarygs, which I suppose 
 to have occurred about eight or nine centuries ago ; and it is my firm opinion that 
 the race, by which the whole western half of the Desert was inhabited at the time 
 of the arrival of the Tiiaryg, were the Imrdd, or Inirath, or Merathah, with the ex- 
 ception of the coimtry of Asben, which it appears was inhabited at that period by 
 Negroes. 
 
 The Imrdd are a widely scattered tribe of the same stock as the Tuarygs, but 
 subjugated and degraded by these, which is the reason that the two names — 
 viz., that of Imrdd and that of Targi — are generally used in contradistinction to 
 each other. The Imrad or Meratbali are not only found round Ghdt and Agilddz, 
 though these are their principal quarters, but they are scattered through the whole 
 Desert, and a great many of them live amongst the Hagdr and the Sakomaren. 
 Though consisting of a great many smaller fractions, the whole body of the Imrsith 
 seems to be divided mio four large J'amilies, which is certainly the case with those 
 living among the Askar.* The names of these four divisions are — the JBatdnatang, 
 called by others Ibetuaten ; the Fdrkanah, or Aferkenen ; the Seyigatdng, and the 
 Wdrivaren. Of these divisions, the two latter seem to live principally in and 
 around the small town of Bdrakat, a few miles S. of Ghilt, in a beautiful forest of 
 date trees of considerable extent, and in and around Yanet or Ganet, a place 
 consisting of the three villages of Selwas, Agahi, and Elmehdn, situated in 
 a fine favoured valley with running water, of which the richest is called 
 Eferri, about 30 miles S. S.W. from Egeri. These two favoured spots of the 
 Desert seem to be left entirely to these people as to tenants, under the condition 
 that they have to take care of the plantations and of the gardens, and to collect 
 the fruit, of which they are obliged to give a portion (o their masters. Some 
 of these (for instance, Si'di Tafel Ucled Sakertaf, who was reported ready to make 
 a razzia against us) seem to have a great many of these people at their disposal. 
 The Batdnatang, or Ibctnaton, reside principally in a Wadi called TesiW, 
 while a part of them have their abode amongst the Hagdr, in a district called 
 Tehellahohet, on the road from Asin to Tuat. The last tribe, viz. the Farkanah, or 
 Aferkenen, dwell in a Wadi called Tarat, about a day's journey N.W. from 
 Ngakell. Besides these four great divisions, there are many other sections of 
 the Imrdd. The names of these are as follows: — The Dig-Siirhi, in the territory 
 of the Askar, in a place called Edehi; the Kel-€ntumn, living in Aderar ; 
 the AmutrileJen, who have their abode in the same sjwt ; the Ke'l-dheuet, 
 living in Haggara; the Akeshewddeii, in the Wadi called Atiil ; the /AeZa//, who 
 have their dwelling-places in Zerzer ; the K^-rdfsa, in Ifak ; the Ke'l-ifCs, in 
 Temarraset ; and, finally, the Ijrdn. In addition to the above mentioned sections, 
 there are the numerous tribes of the Imrdd, scattered about in the valleys around 
 Agitddz, and described in the foregoing chapter ; of these I made out the follow- 
 ing names, without being able to assign to them any certain abode : — they are the 
 Hhcfrheren ; the Kel-tshisem ; the Taranaiji ; the Eddrreban; the lowuswosan ; 
 the Efele'n-gras ; the Ehette'n ; the Tari-wdza ; the Ihingemdngh ; the Egemme'n ; 
 the Edellc'n ; the K^l-te'dele (the three last are closely connected with the Effedayeh, 
 of whom I shall speak afterwards, and participated in the razzia by which our 
 expedition was stripped of a great deal of its property), and the Ihohaue'a. 
 
 The Tuarygs, strictly so called, although distinctly separated into several large 
 families, are often opposed to one another in open hostilities. Nevertheless, there 
 are many instances of sections of one family having settled amongst those of an- 
 other, the most striking example of which kind of transmigration is that of the 
 Ifogas, who, belonging as they do to the Askar, are scattered at present amongst 
 the Kdl-owfs, as well as among the Hagdr, only a small portion of them remaining 
 in the territory of the Askar. In general, however, the different Tiiaryg families 
 keep separate ; and though their boundaries in such a land as this might seem dif- 
 ficult to define, they nevertheless have a fair idea of their territorial rights. 
 
 IJefore proceeding to describe the different groups of the Tuarygs, I shall men- 
 tion some names supposed to be those of tribes which are entirely derived from the 
 Arabs. The first of these is that of Tuaryg el ba'di'ah, or Tiiaryg ei bea'd, out of 
 
 * The meaning of the name of Askar, according to the Tenilkum Ibrahim, a 
 rather intelligent person, is the same as that of the word " taiwiil"= submissive to 
 authority.
 
 40 3Iission to Central Africa. 
 
 ■which there has been formed, somehow or other, the name of a tribe unknown in 
 this part of the world, viz., that of Tiiaryg el abiadh, or the Avhite Tuarygs, — a 
 curious sort of composition. Ikit Tiiaryg el abiadh is nothing but a general name, 
 under which the Tiiatis comprise all the iraiutcrimj trihcs ot the Tuarygs, in con- 
 tradistinction to the Kel-owis, whu live in villac/es. The second of these names 
 is that of Hardr, by which I was myself led into an error some time ago, supposing 
 it to signify a distinct tribe, as I had been positively assured ; but Ilanir is nothing 
 but a general Arabic name for all the free people, in contradistinction to the 
 Imrdd. 
 
 The families of the Tuarygs, reckoning from N.E. to W., and then to ti)e 
 S.E., are as follows : — The Askar, the Hagar, the Sakomaren, the Avelimmiden, 
 the Kel-geris and Itesan, and, finally, the Kdl-owis. 
 
 The Askar, or Azkar, who occupy the great portion of the Desert from Ghat 
 westward as far almost as Tiiwat, and southward as far as Asin, from which point 
 their imaginary frontier runs in an angle, until it reaches the westernmost extremity 
 of the northern line just mentioned, have become well known during the last few 
 years. There seem to be five great divisions of this tribe, which, as I learnt from 
 different quarters, is able to bring into the field a force of 2500 men mounted on 
 Meheris, and about the same number of men on foot. The portion of this tribe 
 which at present possesses the greatest strength and afiluence are the Aurdghen, the 
 greater part of whom live in and about the valley of Ari'kim, on the direct road 
 from Murziik to Siidan, and about .00 miles to the S- of Ghdt. 
 
 The tribe that formerly possessed the greatest authority, and which on this 
 account is still called Amanokalen, or the Sultan tribe, is that of the Imanang, who 
 are at present reduced to extreme poverty, and are generally in the Wadi of 
 Di'der. The third tribe, to which lielongs Hatitah, the friend of the English, 
 are the Mardssatang, or the Imarassaten, whose leather tents are pitched in the 
 valley of Zerzua (Tserswa), on the road from Ghat to Tiiwat, about six days' journey 
 from Ghat. 
 
 These three tribes constitute at present, strictly speaking, the community of the 
 Askar, two other divisions, viz., the Ifogas and the Hadanarang, having separated 
 from the principal body. One of these, the Ifogas, are scattered over the whole 
 Desert, a part of them having settled among the Kel-owis, at a place called Torit, 
 on the road from hence to Damergu ; while another section is settled in the more 
 favoured valleys to the eastward of Mabriik. But a small portion remains iu 
 the territory of the Askar, where they have their abode in the valley of Afarah, 
 about half-way between Ghtit and Tiiwat. The second of the tribes, viz., the 
 IIadu)iaram/, is settled in Ademar, not far from the southern frontier of the terri- 
 tory of the Askar, in the midst of the Imr.'id. They are, to some extent at least, 
 migratory plunderers ; and to tliem the freebooters belonged who recently nuirdered 
 two Tibbaui merchants on their road from hence to Ghat, carrying away their 
 whole caravan with no less than thirty-three slaves. 
 
 I did not succeed in obtaining all the names of the subdivisions of the larger 
 families, called faiah in Tarki, of which I was assured by Hatitah himself that there 
 were not less than thirty. The four I succeeded in obtaining are as follows : — 
 The Izohdn and the Ohaeren, both living in the Wadi Ir'araren, and probably 
 belonging to one family, viz., that of the Imanang ; the JXgarrah, probably a 
 section of the Hadanarang, living in Tanit, together with the Imrad and the 
 Ihiawen, or Ihewan, a portion of whom live in Titarsen ; while another section has 
 settled near Tasawah in Fezzan, forming the last link of the chain which connects 
 the Imrad and the Askar. Another link is formed by the ISIahi'resaug, who, like 
 the former, submit to the authority of the Nakhniikhen ; then follow the Ifelelen, 
 who are settled in Tasi'l together with the Imriid. The least degraded of these 
 outcast tribes is said to be the Materiltflcn, whose kindred certainly belong to the 
 Imntd ; hut who are now settled in the Wadi Gharbi in Fezzan. Another section 
 or tribe, mustering about 400 men, half of whom are armed with guns, influences 
 greatly the commerce of the Desert. This tribe, tlie Tem'Utum, on account of the 
 respect they enjoy as a sort of Merabetln (they having adopted the ascetic dogmas 
 of a holy man from Medinah, whose Ziiniyah or cell is a few miles W. of Masrata), 
 is able to carry on almost undisturbed the commerce between Fezzan and Sudan, 
 or the Negroland. To this tribe belonged the people with whom the expedition 
 travelled from Murziik to Air, aiul who by their social character have been of the
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 41 
 
 greatest use to the travellers, in making inquiries respecting the Desert and its ir- 
 habitants, and are partly settled in the Wadi Gharbi, partly in Tigger-odeh, called by 
 the Arabs Tigger-urtin. This village, situated about 20 miles to the W. of IN'ur- 
 zuk, and consisting of hashish huts called tckubber, is their proper residence, 
 where their sheikh or sultan — amanokal — lives. 
 
 In order better to understand the enumeration of the valleys in which the different 
 tribes of the Askar are established, I here add the 
 
 Route from Ghcit to Tsertsutcali (Zerzua) and thence to Eken. 
 
 In going from Ghdt towards the W., on the road to Tiiwat, you reach, after four 
 
 or five hours, Fiut ; on the second day you sleep in Idil ; on the third at Atser 
 
 Intashelt ; on the fourth in Aziikken Temanokalt : on the fifth in Ihdrhaven ; after 
 
 which, on the sixth day, you arrive in Zerzua. From thence, proceeding S. and a 
 
 little K., you encamp, on the first night, in Taeni ; on the second in Tin-tiizist ; 
 
 on the third in Addmar ; on the fourth in Aderar ; on the fifth in Dider; and 
 
 arrive on the sixth in the fine deep valley of Ekeri on the Sudan road. 
 
 ' The Hagdr, or Hagara, who seem to be rather more powerful than the Askar, 
 
 i having a force of 3000 men, mounted on meheris, occupy, as far as 1 could learn, 
 
 I the whole western portion of this part of the Desert. They have been hitherto 
 
 I wrongly placed much too far to the N., being bounded on the S. by the Surgu or 
 
 I Aveli'mmiden ; to the S.E. by the Kel-geris Itesan and Imrad, and to the E. by the 
 
 I Askar and the Sakomaren : I was not able to ascertain their boundaries towards 
 
 I the W. This tribe, often confounded with the Askars, who are not only occasion- 
 
 I ally called Hagar by the Arabs, but often designate themselves by this name, is 
 
 divided into six branches : — First, the Kel-r'dllah, inhabiting the Wadi of Erarar 
 
 j (a general appellation for a valley plain) ; the Bilgeldn, living in the valley of 
 
 j Tefedist; the Taitiik, inhabiting the fine Wadi Arak; the Te'gehin-usidi, who have 
 
 I their abode in the valley of Ter'azzert ; the Inemhah, who pitch their tents in the 
 
 l_\Vadi Tifinakeli ; and the Ikrlei/e'n, who inhabit Animmegel. 
 
 The riches of the Hagar, who do not raise a tribute upon the merchants — at least 
 not upon the Tuwatis — seem in a great measure to be derived from the salt of 
 Tiude'nni (not Tuden) ; and they live almost entirely upon animal food, which diet 
 accounts for their great bodily strength. 
 
 Vocabulary of the Language of Agade'z, which is the same as 
 that spoken at Timbukt^; and the Eastern part of Bambarkah.* 
 
 Air, Tin Tegganah, JVuvember, 1850. 
 
 In thfa vocabulary every word is written as it is pronounced, and I have made use of the follow- 
 ing letters : — 
 
 a, b, d, e, f, g, h, i, j (= to the German dsch), j (equivalent to the French / in jour), It, I, m, n, n 
 ( = the Spanish w), o, p, r, s, s* (= to the English z in the word zeal), sh (the English), t, tsli, u, 
 w, ij, z. 
 
 All these letters are used as they are pionounced in German, except where the contrary is parti- 
 cularly stated. 
 
 Barth. 
 
 Ilaussa. Emghedesie. English. 
 
 rana 
 
 uotta 
 
 temriiro 
 
 bissa 
 
 ghussum 
 
 arcua 
 
 giibbes 
 
 Emghedesie. 
 
 El 
 
 Celestial Phenomena, S^c. 
 
 
 udnu 
 
 sun 
 
 hiuulu 
 
 moon 
 
 haiidu ro ka'ina kaina 
 
 star 
 
 bini 
 
 heaven 
 
 asudiin 
 
 South 
 
 air 
 
 North 
 
 elkiibla 
 
 East 
 
 * Dr. Latham says that the Vocabularies of Barth agree with those of Hodgson, 
 Denham, and Cailliu, except that in Hodgson the numerals go as far as 10. See 
 also Cooley's Negroland, p. 125, note. — Ed.
 
 42 
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 Ilanssa. 
 
 Emghedesie. 
 
 English. 
 
 
 Celestial Phenomena, &c. — {continued). 
 
 yamma 
 
 tsirara 
 
 West 
 
 i rani 
 
 audlan 
 
 summer 
 
 '•'^ diimana 
 
 Sri 
 
 winter 
 
 dali 
 
 ydni 
 
 cold 
 
 s-dfi 
 
 korno 
 
 heat 
 
 iska 
 
 hi'au 
 
 wind 
 
 haddeii 
 
 tsliesuak 
 
 thunder storm 
 
 . . , has'il 
 
 V«^, A**Vruan Alia 
 
 abakka 
 
 haze 
 
 arn'mmu 
 irrin konari_ 
 
 rain 
 
 haeuia 
 
 eginiieuen 
 
 rainbow 
 
 rua 
 
 dri 
 
 water 
 
 haske 
 
 tafFau 
 
 light 
 
 duffu 
 
 kiibaie 
 
 darkness 
 
 hanzi 
 
 honuketl 
 
 dawn 
 
 uta 
 
 koru 
 
 fire 
 
 hayaki 
 
 kau 
 
 smoke 
 
 halshiniita 
 
 korii u deling 
 
 Time and Seasons. 
 
 flame 
 
 Idtta 
 
 meraka 
 
 time, season 
 
 slickara 
 
 ydshi 
 
 year 
 
 uotta 
 
 handu 
 
 month 
 
 dere 
 
 
 
 rana 
 
 kani 
 
 day 
 
 yau 
 
 S'aes-eru 
 
 to-day 
 
 gob^ 
 
 siibbach 
 
 to-morrow 
 
 jibi 
 
 bibi foeo 
 
 the day after to-murrow 
 
 gatta 
 
 gatta 
 
 the third day 
 
 tshitta 
 
 tshitta 
 
 the fourth day 
 
 jia 
 
 bl 
 
 yesterday 
 
 shekaren jia 
 
 bibi fo arosen 
 
 the day before yesterday 
 
 shtkaren baua 
 
 girl 
 
 this year 
 
 shukaren biira 
 
 ydshi ro iuokkei 
 
 the last year 
 
 shikara bar<i utshcu 
 
 ydshi ro teneuat 
 
 the year before 
 
 shekara me sakkua 
 
 ydshi ro koeiketi 
 
 Degrees of Kindred. 
 
 the next year 
 
 mutum 
 
 baro 
 
 man 
 
 motaue 
 
 bar^u 
 
 people 
 
 meji 
 
 aru 
 
 man, husband 
 
 matshe, pi. mata 
 
 uei 
 
 woman 
 
 obd 
 
 baba 
 
 father 
 
 n^ 
 
 nana 
 
 mother 
 
 kakd 
 
 ankilka 
 
 grandfather 
 
 iay^ 
 
 b(5rd 
 
 ancestors 
 
 ndna 
 
 am bdrd 
 
 elder brother 
 
 kan6 
 
 an kaina 
 
 younger brother 
 
 y^ta 
 
 ambdre aroe 
 
 elder sister 
 
 kannua 
 
 an ka'ina(a)rue 
 
 younger sister 
 
 jiiijeri 
 
 aberi n giingu 
 
 embryo 
 
 jarili 
 
 is'akaina 
 
 baby 
 
 da \ 
 yaru^ 
 
 is's-e 
 
 f son 
 
 ! boy> young man 
 
 dia 1 
 boderua ) 
 
 is-aud 
 
 / daughter 
 I girl 
 
 riiftaui 
 
 annana kaina 
 
 uncle 
 
 dan kano n ubiina 
 
 am biiba n kaina 
 
 cousin
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 43 
 
 Ilaussa . 
 
 Emghefies'e. 
 
 English. 
 
 
 Degrees of Kindred — {continued). 
 
 jika 
 
 aiyau 
 
 grandson 
 
 yayennlna 
 
 enneseo 
 
 aunts 
 
 dengi 
 
 ankerario 
 
 relatives 
 
 soriikko 
 
 annir s-ord 
 
 son-in-law 
 
 an go 
 
 ai baharhie 
 
 bridegroom 
 
 amiiria 
 
 tanasduba 
 
 bride 
 
 maraiya 
 
 aguger 
 
 Parts of the Body. 
 
 orphan 
 
 kai 
 
 banro 
 
 head 
 
 idu, pi. idunu 
 
 mo (fo), pi. moeo 
 
 eye 
 
 kund, pi. kiinne 
 
 hanga, pi. hangaka 
 
 ear 
 
 baki 
 
 md 
 
 mouth 
 
 hakkori, pi. hakkora 
 
 ashan, pi. ishenan 
 
 tooth 
 
 halshi 
 
 ddlang 
 
 tongue 
 
 kununatu 
 
 okiilmuden 
 
 cheek-bone 
 
 g6shi 
 
 takannar 
 
 front 
 
 gashi 
 
 habu 
 
 hair 
 
 gdme 
 
 habe rd kabai oenne 
 
 beard 
 
 saje 
 
 habe r<5 ne oenne 
 
 whiskers 
 
 kabba 
 
 kabai 
 
 chin 
 
 hantshi 
 
 nini 
 
 nose 
 
 kofofi n hantshi 
 
 nina n fund 
 
 nostrils 
 
 fuska 
 
 amoiinga 
 
 face 
 
 
 gmdi 
 
 neck 
 
 fof6 
 
 uaga 
 
 lung 
 
 s-iitshia 
 
 ul 
 
 heart 
 
 mak(5 ger6 
 
 tagersut 
 
 throat 
 
 anta 
 
 tdsa 
 
 liver 
 
 tsheki 
 
 gungu 
 
 body 
 
 yeni 
 
 kuji 
 
 blood 
 
 jijjia 
 
 lengi 
 
 nerves 
 
 kashi 
 
 binji, pi. biiijio 
 
 bone 
 
 bargd 
 
 aduf 
 
 marrow 
 
 hanji 
 
 idana 
 
 intestines 
 
 demtshe 
 
 kanba 
 [ gindi 
 
 upper part of the arm 
 forearm 
 
 yasa, pi. yasotshi 
 
 aded, pi. idddduan 
 
 finger 
 
 
 tdf 
 
 palm 
 
 kabbada damtshe 
 
 akobd 
 
 elbow 
 
 kiifada 
 
 ajir 
 
 shoulder 
 
 baya 
 
 ^ banda 
 
 back 
 
 diua 
 
 aburu 
 
 posterior 
 
 kusara 
 
 tozuk 
 
 the rectum 
 
 
 borakkara 
 gina 
 
 1 .^ , fmale 
 1 ge^'taU|f^.^^,^ 
 
 katara 
 
 tshfesokdn 
 
 haunch 
 
 hankarkari 
 
 irardishan 
 
 ribs 
 
 tshignia 
 
 tarema 
 
 thigh 
 
 kaft'a, pi. kafafu 
 
 kd, pi. kdeo 
 
 leg 
 
 guia 
 
 tiimar 
 
 knee 
 
 dombubu 
 
 kd dd uiinni 
 
 lower part of the leg 
 
 tafi n kiiffa 
 
 kd-nta taffa 
 
 sole of the foot 
 
 digge 
 
 taramin derd 
 
 heel 
 
 yasotshi 
 
 kd eunne dediia 
 
 toes 
 
 fata 
 
 kiiru 
 
 skin 
 
 matatsho 
 
 abiin 
 
 dead body 
 
 kas'utnta 
 
 shinsher 
 
 excrement
 
 44 
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 Haussa. 
 
 Emgliedesie. 
 
 English. 
 
 
 Actions and Feelings, 
 
 §'C. 
 
 rai 
 
 afuna 
 
 life 
 
 haifu;ita 
 
 s'areji 
 
 birth, birthday 
 
 mutiia 
 
 buiio 
 
 death 
 
 Raua 
 
 edok 
 
 burial 
 
 koscheiia 
 
 tassakoot 
 
 grave 
 
 
 asakkunsokd 
 
 cradle 
 
 beki 
 
 adduba 
 
 wedding-meal 
 
 amr^ 
 
 kigi 
 
 marriage 
 
 abini 
 
 baiunhar 
 
 business 
 
 abiuna 
 
 anhaia 
 
 matter 
 
 sarauta 
 
 kokeu \fyc6 
 
 [ government 
 1 installation 
 
 hali 
 
 borujja amdha 
 
 custom 
 
 aiki 
 
 goi 
 
 service, occupatiou 
 
 kiauta 
 
 Ddse 
 
 present 
 
 bautii 
 
 - amesh^ 
 
 bondage 
 
 salla 
 
 gingeri 
 
 feast, religious 
 
 salla l(5ya 
 
 gmgeri bdri 
 
 great feast 
 
 urgi 
 
 hiir 
 
 joke, amusement 
 
 uiisa 
 
 biir 
 
 play 
 
 raua 
 
 gani 
 
 dance 
 
 gog^ 
 
 anzel 
 
 music 
 
 murna 
 
 giirgur 
 
 mirth 
 
 fiishi 
 
 akoriid 
 
 anger, wrath 
 
 mafalki 
 
 banderi 
 
 dream 
 
 magana 
 
 kl 
 
 word 
 
 tarin 
 
 aibai-ki 
 
 meaning 
 
 yab6 
 
 addiita 
 
 honour, glory 
 
 kiimmia 
 
 ahaiii 
 
 shame, infamy 
 
 ban kali 
 
 [amaijtaieti 
 
 mind, intellect 
 
 diinka 
 
 aiiban rosd ? 
 
 will 
 
 tunaua 
 
 banguoi 
 
 memory 
 
 sani dadi 
 
 koreme elafia 
 
 peace 
 
 fiidda 
 
 esok 
 
 quarrel 
 
 fama 
 
 bore' Inka 's"6k cm(?gg( 
 
 ?r single combat 
 
 yaki 
 
 oongii 
 
 war, expedition 
 
 tschiua 
 
 dori 
 
 illness 
 
 masasera 
 
 urki 
 
 fever 
 
 ztnzaua 
 
 badani 
 
 small-pox 
 
 yanki 
 
 adiingua 
 
 wound 
 
 nuigaui 
 
 siifari 
 
 medicine 
 
 schascbaua 
 
 kekcs 
 
 lame Animah, 
 
 tattooing 
 
 bissaschd ) 
 dabobi 1 
 
 tshima-raua 
 
 domestic animals 
 
 rakomi, pi. a 
 
 yot'o, pi. the same 
 
 camel 
 
 tagua 
 
 yot'o iiai 
 
 she -camel 
 
 dan tagoe 
 
 Silka 
 
 young camel 
 
 gi'rki 
 
 ufarak 
 
 herd of camels 
 
 sa, pi. sbano 
 
 liaui, pi. hauio 
 
 ox 
 
 Si'mia 
 
 r'oi 
 
 cow 
 
 takerkcri 
 
 as-agdri 
 
 ox of burden 
 
 doki', pi. dauukkai 
 
 ban', pi. bario 
 
 horse 
 
 jaki, pi. jauukkai 
 
 fiirka, pi. farkaio 
 
 ass, donkey 
 
 jaka 
 
 fiirka uai 
 
 female ass 
 
 al fiidda r a 
 
 afakkaran 
 
 mule 
 
 rago, pi. ragona 
 
 figi, pi. figio 
 
 wether, ram 
 
 tiimkia, pi. tuniaki 
 
 aliikka, pi. telco 
 
 sheep
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 45 
 
 IJaussa. 
 
 Emghedesie. 
 Tame Animals — {continued) . 
 
 Englisli. 
 
 akuta, pi. auaki 
 
 hankeni, pi. haukeuio 
 
 goat 
 
 biins'uru 
 
 as-dlak 
 
 he-goat 
 
 : kursana 
 marekf 
 
 tariit 
 
 she-calf 
 
 aru 
 
 he-calf 
 
 kare 
 
 hanshi 
 
 dog 
 
 miisshe 
 
 mush raru 
 
 male cat 
 
 keuua a musa 
 
 miish 
 
 Wild Animals. 
 
 cat 
 
 namendaua 
 
 gengen hamu 
 
 wild animals 
 
 beriiua 
 
 asu'nked 
 
 gazel 
 
 mareia 
 
 tas' inked 
 
 a larger species 
 
 s-orno 
 
 tamarroat 
 
 hare 
 
 nianyaua 
 
 miish 
 
 fox 
 
 dilla 
 
 elfdki 
 
 jackal 
 
 1 s-aki, pi. s'akona 
 jabe n daua 
 
 baba bere, pi. babau 
 
 lion 
 
 gengi n haia 
 
 king of the desert 
 
 jriua 
 
 ham roberq 
 
 elephant 
 
 ueluaiji 
 
 gengi n haui 
 
 ■wild buifalo 
 
 rakomi n daua 
 
 ge'njji n yoes 
 
 giraffe 
 
 damiissa 
 
 tshekhsar? uaijak? 
 
 leopard 
 
 kiira 
 
 tas-uri 
 
 hyena 
 
 beri 
 
 auerkit, pi. tirkidda 
 Birds. 
 
 monkey 
 
 suns'u 
 
 ke'rau, pi. keraua 
 
 bird 
 
 kas"a, pi. kaji 
 
 gurango, pi. gurangaid 
 
 fowl 
 
 kiirtshia 
 
 arukide 
 
 wild dove 
 
 tentiibara 
 
 teddabdr 
 
 pigeon 
 
 S'ab6 
 
 taliat 
 
 guinea-hen ? 
 
 fakara 
 
 kerau 
 
 partridge 
 
 tiituni 
 
 biitutu 
 
 hoopoe 
 
 maiki 
 
 ajader 
 
 eagle 
 
 agulii 
 
 alroriib 
 
 vulture 
 
 jimmenii 
 
 tarai tarai 
 Insects and Reptiles, 
 
 ostrich 
 
 kuj6, pi. kuda 
 
 hameni — is 
 
 fly 
 
 sabbero 
 
 tad us 
 
 mosquito 
 
 kudii n s'limmua 
 
 hammeni, pi. — is 
 
 bees 
 
 tshiruaka 
 
 modedukku 
 
 ? 
 
 siiza 
 
 taiituf 
 
 worm 
 
 keiltshi 
 
 tancglit 
 
 ant 
 
 koiiiii 
 
 noni 
 
 flea 
 
 kolkoto 
 
 gani 
 
 lice 
 
 kadangerd 
 
 rantalla 
 
 lizard 
 
 matshiyi 
 
 gdnshi 
 
 serpent 
 
 koniima 
 
 dai 
 
 Parts of Animals. 
 
 scorpion 
 
 litshia 
 
 tamakkal 
 
 tail 
 
 kafu, pi. kafone 
 
 tand, pi. — oe 
 
 horn 
 
 sail 
 
 kd 
 
 trace, footstep 
 
 gesii 
 
 ginda habii 
 
 mane 
 
 fufilke 
 
 furaii, pi. furaueu 
 
 wing 
 
 musae 
 
 asiifuna 
 
 corpse 
 
 kashi, tos"6ro 
 
 kaka 
 
 excrements, dung 
 
 >-4S/Y*
 
 46 
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 kasa 
 t(5nere 
 diitshi, dtrntsu 
 
 kura 
 
 sauni 
 
 tiiddu 
 
 kogo n dutshi 
 
 konima 
 
 gulbi ) 
 
 mogeji n ruaj 
 
 idanu u riia 
 
 rijia 
 
 rafi 
 
 diiyi 
 
 daua 
 
 itshe, pi. itatshe) 
 
 ittitua ) 
 
 seua n itshe 
 
 sebga, pi. semaji 
 
 kiinnua 
 
 jaien itatua 
 
 fure 
 
 irii 
 
 goreba 
 
 abisga 
 
 talha 1 
 
 adduaj 
 
 graffen 
 
 kriinka 
 
 tshiaua or hakkl 
 
 g6na 
 
 hatshi 
 
 g^ro 
 
 daua 
 
 shinkafTa 
 
 gane 
 
 giinna 
 
 ja n gunna 
 
 mia 
 
 koriish korush 
 
 deblno 
 
 yaieu goreba 
 
 abinshi 
 
 tshiuia 
 
 rua 
 
 tiio 
 
 tubdni 
 
 u^na 
 
 \{^\r,U:'- fiakilso 
 s'limmua 
 raadera 
 n6no 
 
 Emghedesie. 
 
 English. 
 
 Land and Water. 
 
 
 gendii 
 
 earth, country 
 
 ararar bebbau 
 
 plain, waste 
 
 tanji, pi. taujio 
 
 stone, rock 
 
 talammedet 
 
 sand 
 
 abakka 
 
 dust 
 
 tauji kaina 
 
 hill 
 
 ^gef 
 
 mountain 
 
 gusu 
 
 pass, defile, narrows 
 
 as'as'il 
 
 valley, bed of a torrent 
 
 
 river 
 1 water-channel 
 
 ars-ar 
 
 moes 
 
 sources 
 
 bangu 
 afarak 
 
 well 
 
 ge'ngi 
 
 desert 
 
 tugujio 
 
 wilderness, forest 
 
 Vegetables, &c. 
 
 
 tuguji, pi.— is 
 
 ; tree 
 
 [ trees, plants 
 
 ikeuan 
 
 root 
 
 hiiuga, pi. hangaid 
 
 branch 
 
 tugiiji n hangaio 
 
 foliage 
 
 tugiiji n is-s-iio 
 
 fruits 
 
 koraiyo 
 
 blossom, flower 
 
 bibbeo 
 
 seed 
 
 takkuai 
 
 doom 
 
 tds-ak 
 
 suwak 
 
 tabdra 
 
 tuiha 
 
 tagalelli't 
 
 ? 
 
 dand 
 
 ? 
 
 sdbu 
 
 hashish, herbage 
 
 fari, pi. fario 
 
 garden 
 
 haini 
 
 victuals 
 
 haiui bibi 
 
 ghussub 
 
 iibora 
 
 ghafiil 
 
 md 
 
 rice 
 
 k;i 
 
 vegetables 
 
 kiiukana 
 
 melon 
 
 tagale'Ue 
 
 wild melon 
 
 haei 
 
 molukhia 
 
 korush korush 
 
 cucumber 
 
 garuai 
 
 date 
 
 tokkoi eu is'S'eo 
 
 fruits of the doom-tree 
 
 Food and Cookery. 
 
 
 uanha 
 
 food, aliments 
 
 ari 
 
 water 
 
 tdsu 
 
 bas-een 
 
 haiangoi 
 
 dish prepared of beans 
 
 mdsa 
 
 sort of cakes, pr. of ghus- 
 
 
 sub 
 
 goi in haia 
 
 sort of cakes, pr. of wheat 
 
 da ai 
 
 honey 
 
 hiia 
 
 fresh milk 
 
 iu 
 
 sour milk
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 47 
 
 Hausiia. 
 
 Emghedesie. 
 
 English. 
 
 
 Food and Cookery — {continued). 
 
 gia 
 
 motd 
 
 sort of intoxicating bever- 
 
 mai fari 
 
 gl korai 
 
 age 
 butter 
 
 tshikd 
 
 gdshi 
 
 cheese 
 
 naama 
 
 hiimu 
 
 meat 
 
 kills 
 
 kord 
 
 dried meat 
 
 rdmo 
 
 dshem 
 
 broth, soup 
 
 koi 
 
 gdngori 
 
 egg 
 
 gisherf 
 
 kiri 
 
 salt 
 
 barkono 
 
 indahiir nummoeo 
 
 pepper (black) 
 
 kanua 
 
 s6so 
 
 natron 
 
 koUi 
 
 tas"er 
 
 coUyrium 
 
 fura 
 
 kaul 
 
 a beverage made of crude 
 ghussub 
 
 etatshi 
 
 tngfijio 
 
 firewood 
 
 garuashi n uta 
 
 dengid 
 
 fii-e-coals 
 
 tokonia 
 
 kusu 
 
 kitchen-pot 
 
 marufi 
 
 fendii 
 
 cover 
 
 madaiiki 
 
 dokiinha 
 
 handle, ear 
 
 akoshi 
 
 tu 
 
 plate of wood, &c. 
 
 kullia 
 
 gasu 
 
 drinking-bowl 
 
 turmi 
 
 hamberu 
 
 mortar for pounding the 
 ghussub 
 
 taMria 
 
 haegi 
 
 pounder 
 
 lildde 
 
 dmola 
 
 large wooden spoon for 
 drinking 
 
 tshakalu 
 
 k^rau 
 
 spoon for eating 
 
 jirgi 
 
 aglel 
 
 Apparel. 
 
 large wooden bowl for water- 
 ing the animals 
 
 tofa 1 
 rlgaj 
 
 tiibbelu 
 
 ■ dress 
 coloured shirt from Sudan 
 
 toggua 
 
 tiibbelu kaina 
 
 short shirt 
 
 ul'ndu 
 
 urdii 
 
 trowsers 
 
 fula 
 
 fiigla 
 
 cap 
 
 nedi (baki) 
 
 tdbai 
 
 black cotton cloth wound 
 round the face 
 
 rauani 
 
 hauaoga 
 
 cotton cloth, handkerchief, 
 shawl 
 
 Ziinui 
 
 sukumba 
 
 light loose garment thrown 
 over the riga 
 
 ul'lki 
 
 adegcg ; bonunnu 
 
 apron of leather worn round 
 the loins 
 
 takelmd 
 
 tagraid 
 
 sandals 
 
 
 sobbilto 
 
 sort of leather stockings 
 
 leia 
 
 tshira 
 
 small leather pockets worn 
 round the neck 
 
 cljihu 
 
 anerjiif 
 
 pocket 
 
 talkhdtu 
 
 antalkhiltu 
 
 necklace 
 
 s'obd 
 
 kambciha, leiigi 
 
 ring 
 
 duiitsu 
 
 tanjio 
 
 pearls 
 
 karilu 
 
 isun dirang 
 
 ring Avorn round the arm 
 
 kiirii Q kaffa 
 
 guru 
 
 Houses, dec. 
 
 ring worn round the leg 
 
 gan', pi. gariirua 
 
 kdra, pi. koraid 
 
 town 
 
 
 ariua 
 
 quarter, ward 
 
 kauia 
 
 kdra kaina 
 
 village
 
 48 
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 
 Ilaussa. 
 
 Emgliedesie. 
 
 Houses, etc. — (continued] 
 
 English. 
 ). 
 
 g!da 
 
 
 hogu 
 
 house 
 
 k(5si 
 
 
 hoged 
 
 hut of hashish 
 
 ftlda 
 
 
 hogu b6r6 
 
 palace 
 
 l(5ma 
 
 
 korai 
 
 tent 
 
 daki 
 
 
 sbigi'ffa 
 
 room 
 
 riiufti 
 
 
 tajerd 
 
 shop 
 
 bissa gid 
 
 a 
 
 soro nbenfo 
 
 roof, terrace 
 
 sor6 
 
 
 beue 
 
 upper story, tower 
 
 daki n sor6 
 
 sbigi'fiFa n bene 
 
 terrace- room 
 
 tsakiin gida 
 
 gerc ger^ ; or, hogu n nam- 
 
 court-yard 
 
 
 
 mes 
 
 
 banga n 
 
 birni 
 
 agajir 
 
 town-wall 
 
 
 
 jokkotdta 
 
 pinnacles 
 
 kdfa 
 
 
 hiigumme 
 
 Furniture. 
 
 gate, door 
 
 gadd 
 
 
 kardrar 
 
 bedstead 
 
 taberma 
 
 
 asala 
 
 mat 
 
 kilishi 
 
 
 aberuk 
 
 carpet 
 
 uka 
 
 
 tshdlak 
 
 knife 
 
 aski 
 
 
 ki'ab 
 
 razor 
 
 bdtta 
 
 
 te'lbuttan 
 
 box 
 
 
 
 bdtteo 
 
 boxes 
 
 madobi ; 
 
 matsaukatshi 
 
 sokhdieea 
 
 looking-glass 
 
 ni61o 
 
 
 danai 
 
 Arms. 
 
 sort of violin 
 
 kans-akkeli 
 takobi 
 
 takoba v 
 
 sword 
 
 uka 
 
 
 tshdlak 
 
 dagger 
 
 kubd 
 
 
 hogii 
 
 sheath, scabbard 
 
 rataya 
 
 
 dokiinha 
 
 sword-belt 
 
 haniin 
 
 
 bangro 
 
 hilt 
 
 mdshi 
 
 
 y^gi 
 
 spear, lauce 
 
 kehia 
 
 
 tand 
 
 bow 
 
 bakd 
 
 
 tagans'd 
 
 arrow 
 
 kori 
 
 
 kori 
 
 quiver 
 
 girkua 
 
 
 korei 
 
 shield 
 
 shirdi 
 
 
 gdri 
 
 saddle 
 
 shirdi n 
 
 doki 
 
 gari bar' oenne 
 
 horse-saddle 
 
 mashi n 
 
 fidii 
 
 aselis 
 
 shabrack 
 
 lekdffa 
 
 
 tdmar 
 
 stirrup 
 
 les-:iini 
 
 
 ar'aba 
 
 bridle 
 
 karaniaua 
 
 anbairi n gurid 
 
 bells attached to the neck 
 
 
 
 
 of the horse or camel 
 
 akomar 
 
 
 nimbdba 
 
 saddle of a donkey 
 
 Implements. 
 
 tanfassfia 
 
 anniira 
 
 s'ard 
 
 elmdkashi 
 
 mabodl 
 
 makobll 
 
 sendd 
 
 s'ummsijia 
 
 garsd 
 
 tshemides 
 
 kerkdbu 
 
 ndna 
 
 biindu 
 
 alauak 
 
 needle 
 
 thread 
 
 scissors 
 
 key 
 
 lock 
 
 stick 
 
 whip
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 49 
 
 
 Haussa. 
 
 Emgliedesie. 
 
 
 English. 
 
 
 
 
 Implements- 
 
 -(continued.) 
 
 
 fertana 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 hoe 
 
 haiua 
 
 
 guni 
 
 
 
 plough 
 
 auartckk 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 tongs 
 
 miko 
 
 
 I 
 
 gurti 
 
 
 ( 
 
 sledge-hammer 
 
 kugia 
 
 
 ) 
 
 
 
 
 hook-plough 
 
 laiij^ 
 
 
 
 subu ndu nb<5ha 
 
 1 
 
 chopping-knife 
 
 giitari 
 
 
 
 tds-uf 
 
 
 
 axe, hatchet 
 
 egia 
 
 
 
 karf6 
 
 
 
 rope 
 
 egia n kdba 
 
 
 kongo 
 
 
 
 rope made of the leaves of 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 the doom-tree 
 
 sanfo 
 
 
 
 s'anfo 
 
 
 
 pannier, basket 
 
 yt'ka 
 
 
 
 el kurrus 
 
 
 
 bag of leather 
 
 raga 
 
 
 
 elminje'f 
 
 
 
 net 
 
 selka 
 
 { 
 
 
 ablak 
 
 
 
 water-skin 
 
 
 ameital 
 
 
 
 provisions-skin 
 
 takrufa 
 
 
 
 takenif 
 
 
 
 a bag made of the leaves of 
 the doom -tree 
 
 gugii 
 
 
 
 gug.i 
 
 
 
 bucket of leather 
 
 serka 
 
 
 
 asasser 
 
 
 
 chain 
 
 kiisa 
 
 
 
 tshikaffaten 
 
 
 
 nail 
 
 Metals and Articles of Commerce. 
 
 haiia 
 
 tefiirki 
 
 tiirba 
 
 hinniberi 
 
 [ road, way 
 
 1 path 
 
 fatautshi 
 
 aus ulu 
 
 journey 
 
 guseri 
 
 amittel 
 
 provisions 
 
 airi 
 
 aier 
 
 caravan from the south 
 
 takeref 
 
 takeref 
 
 caravan from the north 
 
 kaya 
 
 kaya 
 
 luggage 
 merchandise 
 
 kurdi 
 karba 
 
 nagnrio 
 jeni'kate 
 
 Sgs } purchase with 
 
 komshe 
 
 kumiis 
 
 the pack, bale 
 
 sandd 
 
 bundu 
 
 piece (of cloth, &c.) 
 
 riimta 
 
 naraye asbenis 
 
 borrowing 
 
 bi 
 
 ahangani 
 
 credit, debt 
 
 riba 
 
 rubbakh 
 
 gain, profit 
 
 sindria 
 
 firag 
 
 gold 
 
 as-erfa 
 
 as-uruf 
 
 silver 
 
 karfi 
 
 guru 
 
 iron 
 
 ja n karfi 
 
 gurii kiddd 
 
 copper 
 
 ers^s 
 
 eldem 
 
 lead 
 
 dclma 
 
 gani 
 
 zinc 
 
 
 hadid ess^ni 
 
 iron-plate 
 
 gdshi 
 
 bdbu 
 
 wool 
 
 iibdega fari 
 
 gane 
 
 cotton 
 
 alkamara 
 
 korai 
 
 cambric 
 
 kcirnu 
 
 korun-koriin 
 
 fine coloured leather 
 
 kirgi 
 
 kuru 
 
 bullock's hide 
 
 kaya n kamshi 
 
 tallat 
 
 essence, perfume 
 
 hauri n giua 
 
 giu n eshenan 
 
 elephant's teeth 
 
 donko 
 
 I'u 
 
 wax 
 
 maauni 
 
 tautuf 
 
 scales, weight 
 
 sail 
 
 ke 
 
 ell
 
 50 
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 Haussa. 
 
 irri n mo tan e 
 
 serki 
 
 babii n serki 
 
 bdban serki 
 
 serki n turaiia 
 
 serki n kasua 
 
 boba n gida 
 
 obd n gi'ji 
 
 ud n gi'ji 
 
 baua, pi. bai 
 
 shushau 
 
 serki n gando 
 
 maaiki 
 
 da n gari 
 
 mutum n k'a uge 
 
 ba-ture, pi. turaua 
 
 abokl 
 
 bakd 
 
 tauai 
 
 mai-kiaii 
 
 faraiita 
 
 raa-halbi 
 
 raakami ii ki'fi 
 
 monomi 
 
 tajeri \ 
 
 maidvikiaj 
 
 mai-tiiUa 
 
 ma-fataiitshi 
 
 ma-keri 
 
 me-di'mki 
 
 me-kc'lagai 
 
 me-takclme 
 
 mai-gmni 
 
 mai-r6ko 
 
 farkura 
 
 gerdi 
 
 mai-s*eunani 
 
 muna-feki 
 
 rudi j 
 
 bardu / 
 
 mai-Siita J 
 
 miifasa 
 
 damre 
 
 doka 
 
 dogali 
 
 karanta-ladtin 
 
 rabbori 
 
 tas'onia 
 
 emosa 
 
 motshi 
 
 duukuli 
 
 kusserua 
 
 Emghedesie. 
 
 Knglisli. 
 
 Conditions in Life. 
 
 
 bores n keui 
 
 nutioii, tribe, set of people 
 
 kokoi 
 
 master 
 
 kokoi-berd 
 
 Sultan, king 
 
 kokoi kaina 
 
 chief of the eunuchs 
 
 kokoi geregerc 
 
 the Kaid of the Arabs,.prop. 
 
 
 the master of the country 
 
 
 and 
 
 tagas-a 
 
 the Kaid of the Imrstd 
 
 jobii n kokoi 
 
 judge of the-market 
 
 hog6 n berd 
 
 landlord 
 
 ankoi 
 
 father of the family 
 
 anguoi 
 
 landlady 
 
 baina, pi. bainco 
 
 slave 
 
 aroi hai 
 
 son of a freed slave 
 
 afarin kokoi 
 
 master of the slaves 
 
 hogu n a-goi 
 
 servant 
 
 kora n iss-e 
 
 countryman 
 
 gengi n bero 
 
 stranger 
 
 el r'arab 
 
 the Arab, the white man 
 
 ankere 
 
 friend 
 
 amagar 
 
 guest 
 
 ikneua, pi. ikneuenyo 
 
 enemy 
 
 kut-koi 
 
 herdsman 
 
 koi ge'ngi 
 
 sportsman 
 
 bir-koi 
 
 marksman 
 
 ajeni kifi 
 
 fisherman 
 
 akoi genda 
 
 peasant 
 
 elmang-koi 
 
 merchant 
 
 dir-koi 
 
 retail dealer 
 
 akkoi Siidan 
 
 traveller 
 
 aenet (Targh.) 
 
 blacksmith 
 
 tat;ib-koi 
 
 tailor 
 
 kurii nge koi 
 
 saddler 
 
 tar'mu koi 
 
 shoemaker 
 
 hogii nge koi 
 
 builder, architect 
 
 kinibo-koi 
 
 beggar 
 
 ■waiyd 
 
 strumpet 
 
 gonshinshi'ii-koi 
 
 juggler 
 
 s-iikbkoi 
 
 wrangler 
 
 elmonufek 
 
 concealer 
 
 s-e-koi, pi. s'ekoaieu 
 
 thief 
 
 kom-koien 
 
 highway robber 
 
 hi'gi 
 
 prisoner 
 
 d6k • 
 
 executioner 
 
 baina 
 
 hangman 
 
 karang 
 
 hire 
 
 Miscellaneous. 
 
 ' 
 
 af6 
 
 number, numerals 
 
 maisataI61o 
 
 history, tale 
 
 hamn'io 
 
 motion 
 
 nuirmur 
 
 noise 
 
 kiinkuna 
 
 ball, spherical form 
 
 tdr'mur 
 
 angle
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 51 
 
 Haussa. 
 
 Kmghedei 
 
 >ie. 
 
 Knjjlisli. 
 
 
 
 Verbs. 
 
 
 guddumaua 
 
 
 ha 
 
 
 help ! 
 
 giilFara 
 
 
 uarai darii 
 
 
 give place ! 
 
 sonhai fene 
 
 
 hai 
 
 
 I am born 
 
 ina-da rai 
 
 
 a-funa 
 
 
 I live 
 
 nai sufa 
 
 
 ai-jian 
 
 
 I grow old 
 
 ina amre 
 
 
 amhck 
 
 
 I marry 
 
 nai da 
 
 
 ai-da n is-s-e' 
 
 
 I beget, procreate 
 
 7ia-haifo 
 
 
 ai-hai 
 
 
 I bring forth 
 
 na-mutu 
 
 
 ai-bu 
 
 
 I die 
 
 na-ga ni 
 
 
 ai-gona 
 
 
 I see 
 
 ina-yi 
 
 
 ammau 
 
 
 I hear 
 
 dubi imp. 
 
 hassai 
 
 
 look, imp. 
 
 ilia shauraiia 
 
 
 duuue hanga 
 
 
 I hark 
 
 na-tshe 
 
 
 ai-hur 
 
 
 I say, tell 
 
 naamsa 
 
 
 ai jini 
 
 
 I listen, answer 
 
 uai kurum 
 
 
 ai riu rai, imp. 
 
 danrai 
 
 am silent 
 
 ina tshi 
 
 
 akoi ua 
 
 
 / eat 
 
 na-diindana 
 
 
 ai-dus 
 
 
 I taste 
 
 na-koshi 
 
 
 mantu 
 
 
 I am satiated 
 
 in-sha 
 
 
 anni'n, pf. araidaum 
 
 I drink 
 
 na-bogu 
 
 
 ai-bokutta 
 
 
 I am drunken 
 
 ina guddu n 
 
 daua 
 
 addan gungii n 
 
 s'uru 
 
 / ease nature, prop. I hasten 
 into the bush 
 
 ina kashe 
 
 
 addan kaka 
 
 
 I evacuate 
 
 ina fitsare 
 
 
 hangara 
 
 
 I make water 
 
 nai amai 
 
 
 ayer 
 
 
 I vomit 
 
 nai jebi 
 
 
 ai ua 
 
 
 I perspire 
 
 ina bertshi 
 nike kontshe 
 
 
 ai kani 
 
 
 I sleep 
 am sleeping 
 
 ina tashi 
 natseia dede 
 
 } 
 
 ai tunii 
 
 r 
 
 I rise 
 
 stand upright 
 
 ina fitto 
 
 
 ai fon6kete 
 
 
 / walk, go out 
 
 ina S'akka 
 
 
 ai-te 
 
 
 I come 
 
 na-shigga 
 
 
 ai hiir, imp. nohur 
 
 I come in, penetrate 
 
 na-taf 1 
 
 \ 
 
 1 
 
 ai koi \ 
 
 
 I set out, start 
 
 ni-s"ani 
 
 
 travel 
 
 na-godii 
 
 
 ai-S'oru 
 
 
 I hasten, run, escape 
 
 uai kusa 
 
 
 ai mankete 
 
 
 I come near, approach 
 
 ina giirgusa 
 
 
 mannang 
 
 
 I draw near 
 
 ni niisa 
 
 
 akoi, pi. ai to kate 
 
 I arrive 
 
 ni-komo 
 
 
 ai kate 
 
 
 I return 
 
 na-batshi 
 
 
 ai dere 
 
 
 I lose my way 
 
 na-gaji 
 
 
 ai fargan 
 
 
 I am fatigued 
 
 ni-tseia 
 
 
 kai imp. 
 
 
 I stop, halt 
 
 ina-futaua 
 
 
 asiinfu 
 
 
 I rest 
 
 na jmgena 
 
 
 goro 
 
 
 I lean back 
 
 nauarki 
 
 
 ai gode 
 
 
 I recover 
 
 ina-s6 
 
 
 ai bara 
 
 
 I will, I wish 
 
 ina-s6 en-sea 
 
 
 ai bara ndai 
 
 
 I will buy 
 
 ni ia 
 
 
 araida 
 
 
 I can, am able 
 
 na-fi 
 
 
 ai-bissan 
 
 
 I am better, a greater per- 
 son (than) 
 
 ina yirda 
 
 
 ai gisha 
 
 
 I am persuaded 
 
 ni-tuna 
 
 
 a-hiinguoi 
 
 
 I remember 
 
 nimeida hankali 
 
 yeji'taieti 
 
 
 I forget 
 
 na-mautshi 
 
 
 ai jinak 
 
 
 I take care, pay attention 
 
 na-saba 
 
 
 ai jeiide 
 
 
 I am accustomed 
 
 na-sani 
 
 
 ai bai 
 
 
 / know 
 
 e2
 
 52 
 
 Missio}} to Central Africa. 
 
 uia-yi 
 ina koiua 
 ina koia masa 
 ni ina kedaia 
 na-kr;ltu 
 ina ruhbutu 
 ina iusiilla 
 nai ri'nsua 
 ina tsoro 
 inayiii tshio 
 nai fushi 
 nai tausai 
 uai miirna 
 ina daria 
 ina kuka 
 ina uaka 
 ina urgi 
 na tuma 
 ina raua 
 na-fadi 
 iua-da 
 ni-ba (ka 
 iua kara 
 nama'israaka 
 — kau 
 nini as-a 
 ni danki 
 ni kama 
 ina seki 
 na sabkas 
 ni nikarba 
 na riki 
 nai ne'ma 
 ina bi'dda 
 ninia s'ani 
 ni S'amo 
 ni kora 
 
 ni masa-sata 
 
 ni nabatas 
 
 ni ina aiko 
 
 ina k.iirra 
 
 nai isbi 
 
 uatambaea 
 
 ina roko 
 
 na godda ) 
 
 ina uilna ) 
 
 ina bi 
 
 narima (babiin serki 
 
 na-bia 
 
 ua-gbada 
 
 ina jiranKa 
 
 affai siiekr 
 
 nai laefi 
 
 ma hanna 
 
 na gafdria niaka 
 
 ina rddda 
 
 Emghedesie. 
 
 Knglish. : 
 
 Verbs— (continued). 
 
 
 amman 
 
 1 understand 
 
 a-jende 
 
 I learn 
 
 a-jenda se 
 
 I teach you 
 
 a-keb 
 
 I reckon, count 
 
 a-karoi 
 
 I read 
 
 ai kiteb 
 
 I write 
 
 ai gingeri 
 
 I pray (to God) 
 
 ai je 
 
 I swear 
 
 ahambari 
 
 I am a frightened 
 
 ammadoresC-n 
 
 I am sorry, sad, sick 
 
 ai fus 
 
 I am angi-y 
 
 aime-tiimma 
 
 I compassionate 
 
 aibarbere'o 
 
 / am vierry, glad 
 
 ai giirgur 
 
 I laugh 
 
 a-hiau 
 
 I shed tears 
 
 ii-ddun 
 
 I cry 
 
 a-hiir 
 
 I make a joke, I play 
 
 a-sad 
 
 I spring 
 
 a-gani 
 
 I dance 
 
 ai kang 
 
 Ifall 
 
 ai me 
 
 I have, possess 
 
 nitten (ara'i 
 
 I give 
 
 ai tunto 
 
 I give more, add 
 
 ai yeji nesi 
 
 I return you 
 
 atte s-auketen 
 
 I fetch, bring 
 
 sura (nga 
 
 I put down 
 
 doka fnga 
 
 I raise, lift 
 
 atte jina (nga 
 
 I lay hold (of), catch 
 
 shiiua (nga 
 
 I let loose, let go 
 
 s'umbu (nda 
 
 I take down, unburden 
 
 attiji-nikketen 
 
 I receive, get 
 
 atte kiimba 
 
 I hold fast 
 
 ai hiirketen 
 
 I search, seek 
 
 maugiiru 
 
 I look for 
 
 raidakoi 
 
 
 nukkuoi 
 
 I find 
 
 igata (nga 
 
 I go on, lead on, lead 
 
 
 away 
 
 attesaja (nga 
 
 I steal you 
 
 ai derender 
 
 / lose 
 
 nidadaukatanga 
 
 I send 
 
 akiaua(ni 
 
 I call, call for 
 
 ai garanga 
 
 I meet 
 
 ai banda(ni 
 
 I ask 
 
 atfqii'(ni 
 
 I beg 
 
 akiaber nesi' 
 
 I show 
 
 ahanga ni 
 
 I follow 
 
 angoka (kokoi bar a 
 
 1 am responsible (to the 
 
 
 Sultan) 
 
 ai fer 
 
 / obcji 
 
 manenenda 
 
 I waste, violate, infringe 
 
 abatuni 
 
 I am ready, wait for you 
 
 raaufergra 
 
 I thank you 
 
 I'nsa kakandere 
 
 I offend, trespass 
 
 ai giinga 
 
 I forbid, prevent 
 
 ai soruf nesi 
 
 I forgive you 
 
 uanen liamu 
 
 I calumniate, insinuate
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 53 
 
 na biigga 
 ni kashi 
 
 na-yanki 
 suna-yaiki 
 suntshe 
 naba ts-oro 
 ya fore, 3rd p. 
 nil rama masada 
 
 ni-t^ya 
 
 nai riinguma 
 
 nai ne'ggari tai-e dak& 
 
 eni makarakia 
 
 ni-tasas 
 
 na bisneshi 
 
 Ilia katshia 
 
 S"ani musaia musaia meni 
 
 uia nasou 
 
 nia nase'is 
 
 na ramta 
 
 ni ramta 
 
 niba da kurdi 
 
 bi naba shi (maka) 
 
 na-f^ra 
 
 nauanye 
 
 nai yc'la 
 
 na siibas 
 
 ni niltsbaffe 
 
 na damre 
 
 na bode 
 
 nahalbi 
 
 na du'rkusa 
 
 ina biigga 
 
 ina sohi'i 
 
 ina kuskureua 
 
 ina bashe kuskureua 
 
 s'&ne kaura 
 
 S'ane litsheua 
 ina ketare 
 nia enhau 
 ina sebka 
 ina siisab6 
 ni ina io 
 inasa kiiyena 
 ina inyado 
 
 na-tube 
 nai(shi 
 na-gerta 
 na-share 
 ina uonke 
 ina kekashe 
 ina shenye 
 ina daffa 
 ina hassa(uta 
 
 Emghedesie. 
 
 Verbs — (continued). 
 
 ai bokiitta 
 akoi ianga 
 kokeu ulbu 
 ai diimbua 
 uonguanga 
 irharanga 
 ai uasa hamberi 
 goingi (kokoi 
 attebana-nesesi 
 
 doka nga 
 irkai endorrefu 
 irredau haguma 
 
 attedumni 
 
 attetuenunda 
 
 ai fika nga 
 
 ai yoelli 
 
 akkof barai odcasi 
 
 ai de katanga 
 
 clei(nda 
 
 ai fojia(nga 
 
 akkoi s'obuennit 
 
 atteiian nagrio 
 
 meraka)agnha adere 
 
 ai shinshi 
 
 mardeben 
 
 ai batiinni 
 
 ai muna nga 
 
 ai jina nga 
 
 albana nga 
 
 ai faera nga 
 
 birauga 
 
 ai segin 
 
 ai bokiitta 
 
 sarai 
 
 biranga ; akumanga 
 
 indabirauga ; asukku- 
 
 niiinga 
 akkoi tenii 
 
 akkoi yokai 
 
 ai sat 
 
 bari6)egang 
 
 snimb(i 
 
 ne s'lmbiikkate 
 
 aibara ariga 
 
 addeniin bango 
 
 tiingarkoi 
 
 aikaianga 
 
 aidani'(nga 
 
 aigoeii nga 
 
 ai haba 
 
 ai hi mm i a nga 
 
 ai-kok, imp. akok 
 
 ai dani nga 
 
 ai hind nga 
 
 ai foniis (hor'u 
 
 English. 
 
 I beat 
 
 / hill 
 
 the Sultan kills 
 
 I wound 
 
 they are at war 
 
 they are victorious 
 
 I punish 
 
 the Sultan punishes 
 
 I take vengeance on you 
 
 for 
 / assist 
 I embrace 
 I do good to you, treat you 
 
 well 
 I conduct you 
 I awake 
 I bury 
 I circumcise 
 I exchange, barter 
 I buy 
 I sell 
 I borrow 
 I lend 
 I pay 
 
 I owe (you 
 / begin 
 I finish 
 I wait 
 I throw 
 I catch, take 
 / bind 
 
 I loose, untie, open 
 I aim, take my aim at 
 I kneel down 
 I shoot, let fly, discharge 
 I pierce, stab 
 
 I miss my throw, the mark 
 I do not miss 
 
 I change my spot, dwelling 
 
 place 
 I pass by 
 
 I cross (a mountain 
 I mount 
 I dismount 
 I descend 
 
 I (am about to) swim 
 I dress 
 I dress stately, put on full 
 
 dress 
 I undress 
 
 /make, do ^^ 
 
 I arrange 
 I clean 
 I wash 
 I dry 
 
 I air, put into the sun 
 I cook 
 I allume, kindle, light
 
 54 
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 ina fiin'i 
 
 ni kashi ) 
 
 111 tuffi J 
 
 na koiii 
 
 na kario 
 
 ni suba. 
 
 ina yuia 
 
 ni jirgitta 
 
 na ja riia 
 
 niba sha 
 
 iukaffa(laema 
 
 inkadda(. . . 
 
 ni ina jinni (kasa 
 
 ni ina shibka 
 
 na shibkaua itshe 
 
 ina tiira 
 
 nabisni 
 
 nasara etatshe 
 
 ni nafede(shi 
 
 rufe 
 
 serkafo 
 
 ina dilkka 
 
 ina nika 
 
 ina dama 
 
 ina dimki 
 
 ina yanka 
 
 niatshag^ 
 
 niruba 
 
 ni auna 
 
 na saka 
 
 na rinna shi 
 
 — yakoma 
 
 — shina so 
 
 — ya kammata 
 
 — ya fi 
 
 — akkoi riba 
 
 — yai-sa 
 shike-nan 
 
 — ya-kari 
 
 Emghedesie. 
 
 Verbs — (continued). 
 kaui 
 daba nga 
 
 ai kiirkur 
 
 ai bakii nga 
 imp. attiiinana nga 
 ammo (n an' 
 dan a nga 
 aisakkatari 
 ai naui (yoco 
 taetea nga 
 kakabii nga 
 afasga nda 
 fika nga 
 
 monfngi tugdjio 
 ashedauiugi 
 afiki ngi 
 
 akosi ngi 
 koi inda nga 
 addabd nga 
 akkainehin jeda 
 addiit 
 afufii 
 
 akurba nga 
 tatab 
 
 dumbu anga 
 koratanga 
 yebena uga 
 nesa nga 
 ni danrai 
 ai si'lbis 
 arie aid 
 aibara uga 
 atakinda nga 
 abesa nga 
 ariibbakh abara 
 ato 
 
 inganoda 
 aben 
 
 English. 
 
 I blow, blow up 
 
 I put out, extinguish 
 
 I burn 
 
 I break, destroy 
 
 I pour in 
 
 I pour out 
 
 I turn over, upside down 
 
 I draw water 
 
 I give to drink 
 
 I pitch (the tent 
 
 I take down ( . . . 
 
 I cultivate, till 
 
 I sow 
 
 I plant a tree 
 
 I gather, gather in, reap 
 
 I store up, prop. I bury, 
 
 hide iu the ground 
 I cut wood 
 
 I flay, strip off the skin 
 I shut 
 I lock up 
 I pound 
 I grind 
 I stir up 
 I sew 
 I cut 
 
 I rend, tear asunde r 
 I divide, share 
 I measure, weigh 
 I weave 
 I dye 
 
 it does become 
 it must 
 it is worth 
 it is better 
 it is useful 
 it is enough 
 that is settled, finished 
 it is at an end, consumed 
 
 Phrases. 
 
 guserimmo suu-kari 
 
 irrenemmetdl abdn 
 
 our provisions are gone 
 
 — akkoi 
 
 abeira 
 
 
 there is, I have 
 
 — babu 
 
 ashia nga 
 
 
 there is none, I have not 
 
 — ko akkoishi 
 
 kabara 
 
 
 perhaps there may be, it is 
 possible 
 
 yaki yatshe 
 
 aiuangu 
 
 
 the victory is gained, the 
 war devours 
 
 ya faso 
 
 afakkod 
 
 
 the battle is lost, the war is 
 thrown back 
 
 — shina tshio 
 
 addori 
 
 
 — is sick 
 
 — ya-batshi 
 
 akhas^ra 
 
 
 — is spoiled 
 
 — ya-nerki 
 
 amegadi 
 
 
 — does melt 
 
 — yayi doi 
 
 auimmaia i 
 
 iga 
 
 — does stink 
 
 — shin a da kamsh 
 
 ahumbu 
 
 
 — has a nice smell 
 
 — ya shiggi 
 
 ahiir 
 
 
 the rain) comes in
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 55 
 
 Emghedesie. 
 
 Phrases — (continued). 
 
 rua ya shiggi da auen- 
 nangida 
 
 ari hurketehogii rokuna 
 
 auennanDaua 
 
 naka 
 
 nasa 
 
 memeianga 
 
 anguanc 
 
 anguanaiki 
 
 namu 
 
 naku 
 
 arundiienni 
 induenni 
 
 nasu 
 
 rua) shinaguddu 
 
 ingoenne 
 — as'urti 
 
 itshe) shina fi'ta 
 
 — akhonu 
 
 — yanona 
 tokona baynona ba 
 
 — ahiud 
 almere anhina 
 
 — yci sefii 
 
 ait- 
 
 — ya tafasa 
 
 anas 
 
 — ya fiira 
 
 a-fonus 
 
 rana) taf ita 
 
 uenu houuketi 
 
 rana) ta adi 
 
 uenu kang 
 
 — shanagi 
 
 — atunu 
 
 — shina-kerkaru 
 
 — shinakcira 
 
 — ayaketen 
 
 — ahian 
 
 — shina-ruori 
 
 — atiisset 
 
 — shinahabshi 
 
 — atiisset 
 
 — shina-kiwo 
 
 — akut 
 
 — shina-yin koi 
 
 — yabaifo 
 
 ina da rakoma biu 
 
 — addan gungori 
 
 — hai 
 aima-yoe inka 
 
 kaaa da gida neggeri 
 
 aime hogu gum a 
 
 auennan mutum shinada 
 
 aro boru amu ban' aniig- 
 
 doki neggeri 
 munadaguseri deua 
 
 guma 
 irremaia amutel babo 
 
 kuu&da serki maigaskia 
 sunuda dukia tari 
 auennan matshe ta na da 
 tshiko tana so taseisshi 
 nagani rakoma tari 
 hagani auennan jimmena 
 ya-gani kasa n Borno 
 
 mu nga ni abokinka 
 kii ngani baba n serki 
 su ngani s'akona tari 
 
 ni ba ka rauani neggari 
 kai kabd ni sdnia fodu 
 sofo) shi ba masa bai okd 
 
 matshe ta bdni tshiko biu 
 
 English. 
 
 the water penetrates into 
 
 this house 
 this is mine 
 ~ thine 
 
 '- his 
 
 mu mu n kdma girki'nka aijiuin indingyoeo 
 
 kukuna ramta mona 
 s-ambar oku muma- 
 isma kushi da Sinder 
 
 ni ina bugga nka 
 
 kai kabuggani 
 
 indes'ibnet I'rresi mitekal 
 ins'a irre yiokkai 
 Smder 
 
 ni bukku s'urai 
 
 attebukkutui 
 
 yours 
 theirs 
 
 irremai kokoi guma 
 
 irremai elma'm 
 
 ar wai ame gashi de ocnne 
 
 abara n donde 
 niiggeno yueo babo 
 aigomi tarai tarai 
 ro boru aguna genda 
 
 Borno 
 irre gonii irri'nkere 
 irre gona kokoi bere 
 irre gona baba-bere' babo 
 
 nitten are tobe guma 
 atten tlni hau 'tftki 
 iirjono) atten dsi baina 
 
 'I'ns'a 
 wai ro anne rai gashi I'nka 
 
 the water) is running 
 the tree) grows 
 the fruit) is ripe 
 ) is not yet ripe, is 
 
 unripe 
 it becomes cold 
 it boils 
 it bums 
 the sun) rises 
 
 ) sets 
 
 the bird) is flying 
 
 the hen) cackles 
 
 the animal) cries, bleats, 
 
 &c. 
 the lion) roars 
 the dog) is barking 
 the animal) is feeding 
 
 — is laying eggs 
 
 — brings forth young ones 
 / have two camels 
 
 thou hast a nice horse 
 this man has a nice horse 
 
 we have plenty of pro- 
 visions 
 You have a just master ■ 
 they have plenty of money 
 this woman has cheese 
 (which) she wants to sell 
 / see many camels 
 you see this ostrich 
 he has seen Borno 
 
 we have seen your friend 
 you have seen the Sultan 
 they have seen many lions 
 
 / give you a fine kerchief 
 thou givest me four cows 
 the Sheikh) he gave him 
 
 three slaves 
 this woman {she) gives me 
 
 three cheeses 
 we take from you your 
 
 camels 
 lend us 3000 (cowries), we 
 
 will return you them in 
 
 Sinder 
 / beat thee 
 thou beatest me
 
 56 
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 Haussa. 
 
 Emgliedesie. 
 
 Phrases — (continued.) 
 
 English. 
 
 
 auennan mutum shina 
 
 are r6 abiikkutu wai ro 
 
 this man is beating 
 
 that. 
 
 buggata 
 
 
 woman 
 
 
 muna buggiinsu 
 
 irri bukkat ingi 
 
 we beat them 
 
 
 ku kuna bugga mu 
 
 ingi bukkat aeri 
 
 you beat us 
 
 
 su suna bugga nta 
 
 I'ugidan bukkut dnga 
 Pronouns. 
 
 the;/ beat her 
 
 
 nia 
 
 arai(da 
 
 I 
 
 
 kai 
 
 [ne(da]kia 
 
 thou 
 
 
 shi 
 
 inga(da 
 
 he 
 
 
 ta 
 
 anga(da 
 
 she 
 
 
 ma 
 
 irre(da 
 
 we 
 
 
 ku 
 
 indu(da 
 
 you 
 
 
 su 
 
 ingi(da 
 
 Cardinal Numbers. 
 
 they 
 
 
 daea 
 
 afo 
 
 1 
 
 
 bin 
 
 ayi'nka 
 
 2 
 
 
 okti 
 
 ayins-a 
 
 3 
 
 
 fodii 
 
 ataki 
 
 4 
 
 
 bier 
 
 hamsa 
 
 5 
 
 
 shidda 
 
 sitta 
 
 6 
 
 
 bokoi 
 
 sabd 
 
 7 
 
 
 tdkus 
 
 temanie 
 
 8 
 
 
 t£lra 
 
 tshcsora 
 
 ' 9 
 
 
 goraa 
 
 gashera 
 
 10 
 
 
 goma sha daea 
 
 giishera ki'nji f6 
 
 11 
 
 
 goma sha bin 
 
 gashera kmji-ihka 
 
 12 
 
 
 goma sha tara 
 
 ascheriro afo 'shi (prop, 
 ashia) 
 
 19 
 
 
 asherin 
 
 asherin 
 
 20 
 
 
 asherin da tiira 
 
 telatin dfo'shi 
 
 29 
 
 
 ttlatin 
 
 ttlatin 
 
 30 
 
 
 te'latin da daea 
 
 te'latin kinji fo 
 
 31 
 
 
 te latin da tara 
 
 arbaein afo 'shi' 
 
 39 
 
 
 arbaein 
 
 arbaein 
 
 40 
 
 
 arbaein da daea 
 
 arbaein kinji fo 
 
 41 
 
 
 arbaein da tara 
 
 hamsin afo 'shi 
 
 49 
 
 
 hamsin 
 
 hamsin 
 
 50 
 
 
 hamsin da daea 
 
 hamsin kinji fo 
 
 51 
 
 
 hamsin da tiira 
 
 setti'n afo 'shi 
 
 59 
 
 
 settin 
 
 settin 
 
 60 
 
 
 sebaein 
 
 sebaein 
 
 70 
 
 
 sebaein da daea 
 
 sebaein kinji fd 
 
 71 
 
 
 sebaein da tdra 
 
 temanin afo 'shi 
 
 79 
 
 
 tcmanin 
 
 temanin 
 
 80 
 
 
 temanin da daea 
 
 tdmanin kinji fd 
 
 81 
 
 
 temanin da tara 
 
 tesaein afo shi 
 
 89 
 
 
 tesaein 
 
 tesaein 
 
 90 
 
 
 tesaein da daea 
 
 tesaein ki'nji fd 
 
 91 
 
 
 tesaein da tara 
 
 miet afo 'shi 
 
 99 
 
 
 ko dari daea btibu dari 
 
 uiiet 
 
 100 
 
 
 s'ongii 
 
 
 
 
 debii-s-arabar 
 
 agi 
 
 1000 
 
 
 fc-ambar goma 
 
 s'ambar gashera 
 
 10,000 
 
 
 ■i'dmbar dan' 
 
 s'dmbar dari 
 
 100,000 

 
 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 57 
 
 Haussa. 
 
 nafari 
 nabaia 
 na okii 
 na fodii 
 na bi'er 
 na shi'dda 
 nabokoi 
 na tukus 
 na tara 
 nagoma 
 nashadaea 
 naasherin 
 nabaya 
 
 hanzi 
 
 dufFu 
 
 dayi ) 
 
 daua i 
 
 shebkakaua 
 
 safi 
 
 seui 
 
 dogo 
 
 dagirma \ 
 
 babii J 
 
 karami 'k 
 
 kananne / 
 
 sofo 
 
 sabo 
 
 nasa 
 
 suriifi 
 
 detshau 
 
 kajere 
 
 dafadi 
 
 mas'utshe 
 
 deua tari 
 
 diikka 
 
 sashe 
 
 sashe u sashe 
 
 na biu 
 
 rage 
 
 tsheke 
 
 babu komi 
 
 kadiinna 
 
 kiisa 
 
 da-nisa 
 
 ncggeri ) 
 
 da-kiau J 
 
 mugo 
 
 da kiirfi 
 
 bashe da kiirfi 
 
 lafia 
 
 tshio 
 
 sunyankini 
 
 da siitshia 
 
 tsori) 
 
 dakiau u fiiska 
 
 mogu u fuska 
 
 Emghedesie. 
 
 English. 
 
 Ordinal Numbers. 
 
 
 isaren 
 
 the first 
 
 ahinkaueni 
 
 the second 
 
 ahins'aueni 
 
 the third 
 
 ataki auenni 
 
 the fourth 
 
 hamsauenni 
 
 the fifth 
 
 sittauenni 
 
 the sixtli 
 
 sebaraiienni 
 
 the seventh 
 
 temanieaiienni 
 
 the eighth 
 
 tcsarauenni 
 
 the ninth 
 
 r'asheraeiinni 
 
 the tenth 
 
 ashera kinji fdenni 
 
 the eleventh 
 
 asherindcde 
 
 the twentieth 
 
 bandaiienni 
 
 the last 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 
 taffo 
 
 clear 
 
 kubai 
 
 dark 
 
 gengi 
 
 desert 
 
 wild 
 
 farindaro 
 
 cultivated 
 
 komd 
 
 warm 
 
 yeni 
 
 cold 
 
 kuku 
 
 high 
 
 bcre 1 
 
 great, large, extensive 
 great 
 
 kaina 
 
 small, little, young 
 
 arjond 
 
 old 
 
 taliet 
 
 new, young 
 
 angueni 
 
 elder 
 
 bangu 
 
 deep 
 
 akukii 
 
 long, high 
 
 adiingura 
 
 short 
 
 afaet 
 
 wide, spacious 
 
 kitta 
 
 tight, close 
 
 babd 
 
 much, many 
 
 ka 
 
 whole, all 
 
 gere 
 
 half 
 
 gere n gere 
 
 quarter, fourth 
 
 ahinka-uiinne 
 
 more 
 
 jebanga 
 
 less 
 
 tonanga 
 
 full 
 
 haikashen 
 
 empty, there is none 
 
 kdtaraa 
 
 few 
 
 maud 
 
 near 
 
 amur 
 
 far 
 
 aguma 
 
 good, fine 
 
 nice 
 
 futii 
 
 bad 
 
 ammegabi 
 
 strong 
 
 anmegiibi 
 
 weak, frail 
 
 elrafia 
 
 safe, in good health 
 
 ddri 
 
 ill 
 
 idunbarai 
 
 wounded, 1 am 
 
 indaul 
 
 courageous 
 
 hiimbarf 
 
 coward, timid 
 
 indeinmd guma 
 
 pretty, handsome 
 
 inaufutii 
 
 ugly
 
 58 
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 Ilaussa. 
 
 tshio n s'utshia 
 
 yungua 
 
 nia yuDgua 
 
 kishi n riia 
 
 da hdnkali 
 
 bashe 
 
 mai kukari 
 
 iiigu 
 
 mai haushi 
 
 mai yeuenroko 
 
 mogu n s'utshia 
 
 mai giiskia 
 
 da-karia 
 
 hassada 
 
 da-kiauta 
 
 basche 
 
 sadaka 
 
 magadi 
 
 dalili 
 
 ma-aiki 
 
 ya-gaji 
 
 ma-kafo 
 
 kurma 
 
 bashe magana 
 
 dungii 
 
 nofi 
 
 mai kurdi 
 
 taliikka 
 
 shinada mata 
 
 bache dash'i mata 
 
 tamro 
 
 ta na da tsheki 
 
 ya siiba 
 
 ya rima 
 
 da naui 
 
 basche 
 
 da uia 
 
 detshada 
 
 bache dauia 
 
 da-dama 
 
 ma-maki 
 
 gaskia 
 
 karia 
 
 ji'kake 
 
 kekiishase 
 
 taiirai 
 
 gurbi 
 
 tuddu 
 
 dedo 
 
 kerkatatshe 
 
 keiiaye 
 
 mai kiisseri 
 
 anona 
 
 dandne 
 
 dene 
 
 tsheke 
 
 babu komi 
 
 daeyana 
 
 tard 
 
 Emghedesie. 
 
 Adjectives — (continued). 
 
 ulin duri 
 
 here 
 
 iii dadcn here 
 
 flit, ai fdt 
 
 indataieti 
 
 annemai taieti 
 
 amai tiiufa 
 
 an-nebesuk 
 
 akiirteni 
 
 nikke fojembo 
 
 lilfutu 
 
 ammai kimi 
 
 tan-rari 
 
 uanhamu 
 
 amai tanafo 
 
 anme tanafo 
 
 tshikotaua 
 
 kaber(5u bara 
 
 addalil 
 
 amai-gooi 
 
 afergnir 
 
 assiigguna 
 
 asummau 
 
 asekki 
 
 kebako 
 
 hanshi 
 
 elman-koi 
 
 talak ; annemai haika 
 
 amme uai 
 
 anemai uai 
 
 bard 
 
 amai giingu 
 
 ajende 
 
 agoka 
 
 atshing 
 
 an-itshi'ug 
 
 } ageb I 
 
 > auege'b | 
 
 elmussala 
 
 kimi 
 
 tdn-rali 
 
 mosanemo 
 
 kekasashe 
 
 ashendi 
 
 as'iis'il 
 
 eg6f 
 
 eyigidda 
 
 alanghaii 
 
 aiag"le 
 
 tiigmur 
 
 abina 
 
 I atai I 
 
 tonunga 
 haikashcn 
 afo 
 irhanga 
 
 English. 
 
 sad, mournful 
 
 hungry 
 
 I am hungry 
 
 thirsty, I am 
 
 prudent, clever 
 
 imprudent 
 
 clever, skiltul 
 
 stupid, foolish 
 
 impudent, bold-faced 
 
 importunate 
 
 malicious, cruel 
 
 honest, true, just 
 
 false 
 
 jealous, envious 
 
 liberal, generous 
 
 illiberal 
 
 charitable 
 
 ambitious 
 
 humble, submissive 
 
 active, industrious 
 
 weary (he is 
 
 blind 
 
 deaf 
 
 dumb, mute 
 
 lame 
 
 naked 
 
 rich 
 
 poor 
 
 married (he is 
 
 unmarried 
 
 with child (she is 
 
 accustomed (he 
 
 responsible (he 
 
 heavy 
 
 li-ht 
 
 difficult 
 
 dear 
 
 easy 
 
 cheap 
 
 wonderful 
 
 true 
 
 false 
 
 humid 
 
 dry 
 
 hard, dry 
 
 hollow, concave 
 
 convex 
 
 straight, direct 
 
 curved 
 
 round 
 
 angular 
 
 ready, ripe 
 
 unripe 
 
 green 
 
 full 
 
 empty 
 
 alone ' 
 
 together
 
 Mission to Central Africa- 
 
 59 
 
 Haussa. 
 
 Emghedes'e. 
 
 Adjectives — (continued). 
 
 English. 
 
 da-kaifi 
 
 ai-uel 
 
 sharp 
 
 da dauda 
 
 amai jibi 
 
 dirty 
 
 bashe da dauda 
 
 anemai jibi 
 
 clean 
 
 errafia 
 
 errafiar 
 
 fine 
 
 fan' 
 
 koral 
 
 white 
 
 baki 
 
 bibi 
 
 black 
 
 rauea 
 
 erara 
 
 yellow 
 
 ja 
 
 kidde 
 
 red 
 
 deffoa 
 
 siibu 
 
 blue 
 
 tshangua 
 
 firiji 
 
 green 
 
 e'lkas 
 
 ^Igas 
 
 green 
 
 dddi 
 
 kand 
 
 sweet 
 
 d^tshi 
 
 hornd 
 
 bitter 
 
 da gisheri 
 
 kiri 
 
 salt, briny 
 
 tshami 
 
 amdt 
 
 sour 
 
 dedji 
 
 akornd 
 
 Pronouns. 
 
 strong, well seasoned 
 
 uonnan 
 
 ard 
 
 this 
 
 ueatshan 
 
 ardssen 
 
 that 
 
 
 udni 
 
 a certain (m. 
 
 
 tamendem 
 
 a certain (f. 
 
 kaua 
 
 honiinnu 
 
 somebody 
 
 uanndue 
 
 maaiki 
 
 who 
 
 uoddanda 
 
 udddan indanga 
 
 that, which 
 
 me 
 
 baki 
 
 what 
 
 bar 
 
 harrasdn 
 
 also, even, himself 
 
 ko onne 
 
 ma-hdka 
 
 every one 
 
 da junansu 
 
 endenkeraien 
 
 amongst each other 
 
 osu-osu 
 
 afuyo-afdyo 
 
 some, others 
 
 naua 
 
 mergi 
 
 Adverbs. 
 
 how much 
 
 dagandn 
 
 eng6ffo 
 
 here 
 
 dagatshdn 
 
 affoe-ussen 
 
 there 
 
 dtima 
 
 kamba aro-issiia 
 
 to the right 
 
 haniin hogii 
 
 kamba aucnni 
 
 to the left 
 
 kabd 
 
 kdngo 
 
 straight on 
 
 ina 
 
 mananga 
 
 where 
 
 urinda 
 
 ddro 
 
 where (rel. 
 
 bi'ssa 
 
 bdiie 
 
 on, over 
 
 kc'rkashd 
 
 kidd 
 
 under 
 
 kabd 
 
 ijinanga 
 
 opposite 
 
 bc'lya 
 
 biinda 
 
 behind 
 
 ketare 
 
 sat-anga 
 
 on the other side 
 
 kus;l da 
 
 mand 
 
 by, by the side, close to 
 
 tsaka(n 
 
 gerdgerd 
 
 interior, in 
 
 tshikl(u 
 
 aiiimas 
 
 between, among 
 
 uje 
 
 ti'irar 
 
 outside 
 
 ktiuaie 
 
 Idngusu 
 
 round, round about 
 
 yens-u 
 
 inarda 
 
 now 
 
 yautshe 
 tokoua 
 
 • el mdre 
 
 just now, instantly 
 not yet 
 
 kiillum 
 
 kiilluin 
 
 every day 
 
 dafiUi 
 
 is'iireu 
 
 before, once 
 
 sodaea 
 
 kae fo 
 
 one time
 
 60 
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 koi yaushi 
 dadai 
 
 yaushi 
 
 so iiaua 
 
 kak^ 
 
 kakil kaki 
 
 kamsin 
 
 d^de 
 
 da-s6nsa 
 
 da ktirfi, tilis 
 
 tard da 
 
 baslii da shi 
 
 hiikkana 
 
 to 
 
 mm bahakkana 
 
 domd 
 
 domm 
 
 mas'il 
 
 sanu sanu 
 
 kadan kadan 
 
 Emghedesie. 
 
 Adverbs — (continued). 
 
 aldka 
 
 kala 
 
 me'nde fo 
 
 alar-fo 
 
 ingi marg^ 
 
 maso 
 
 sandiu kiu4 
 
 asauen da(ro 
 
 I'gedd 
 
 indcmbara 
 
 nittedanmga de gdli 
 
 irhanga mefandan 
 
 annemai anga 
 
 minjida 
 
 indasa 
 
 anneki manjida 
 
 mikinga 
 
 arom moga 
 
 tamba 
 
 mdsu 
 
 kaina kaiua 
 
 English. 
 
 sometimes, always 
 never 
 
 when 
 
 how often 
 
 how 
 
 how do you do 
 
 as 
 
 like 
 
 spontaneously 
 
 by force 
 
 together with 
 
 without 
 
 so, in such a way 
 
 yes, well 
 
 no, not so 
 
 why 
 
 because 
 
 speedily, immediately 
 
 slowly, gently, by degrees 
 
 slowly 
 
 THE PRODIGAL SON. 
 
 Luke 
 
 Haussa. 
 
 Akkoi wonni mutiim shi na da yaya 
 biu. 
 
 12. karami tshiki nsu yatshe da obd, 
 bani rabi ndukia da ya fdda gareni. 
 da ya rdba masu dukia-su. 
 
 13. baya koauiiki babu deua karami da 
 ya tara abiibua diikka yatafi gari 
 danisa nan ya uatshe dukia su yayin 
 shahilitshi. 
 
 14. da ya gbada dukka akkoi baba n 
 yungua ga gari nan, da ya fara rashi. 
 
 15. da ya taf i yilyi sufari kiinsa ga 
 uonni mutiim na gari niiu da ya aika 
 sa tshiki n gonaki sa shiyi kiwo u 
 gurustinai. 
 
 16. shina guri shitshika tshiki nsa da 
 yayen doraua uod da gurusiinai su 
 katshi. 
 
 1 7. da ya-k(5mo gakansa yatshd baua 
 nana na obilna, sunK. da masa tari, am- 
 mani ina namutu da yungua. 
 
 18. ni itashi ni itafi ga obdna ni itshe 
 dashi oba nayi suuiifi ga Alia da gaba 
 garcka. 
 
 19. ba n kiimma kammata ba akyirra 
 ni da uka kayini daea ga baruii nka. 
 
 20. yatashi yasakka ga oba nsa da shike 
 nlsa oba nsa yaga uasa yayi tausai 
 yayi giidda ya fadi ga uya nsa ya 
 ledsasa. 
 
 Emghedesie. 
 Bord fd bar^nnu amai iss'e 'inka. 
 
 kaina bari ngi babd keni. narai elma 
 
 nih gdre is'e kandga. ajabin nisa il 
 
 md. 
 bauda niigguma kaina ashidda uhajc' ka 
 
 akkoi kdra n mord enndda ase saein 
 
 elmd. 
 
 ga haiyishianga asaese il ma, haere bebe 
 ahanganga kora jikona gashiiishi 
 gianis's'e akkoi kdra-fdkona adiinna- 
 afdso sdfari borefd kora jiienni 
 adauanga anfari kuna an kdtid el 
 khansir. 
 
 ahiir antdnnan gungu en dal elrarabaro 
 en is-s"eo iua el khaus'ir inhdniu 
 annis'iingais'S'e yakat(5n anbangroscn. 
 baena angiieni anbaban im mai 
 wuababd, ai boniin da haere. 
 
 astondn koi ambdba dard, nibbara 
 
 niingua mefdnda aiden as'cniib irrin 
 
 koi dard iudenan mangina. 
 isukkoi keroi sendan en is'S"ed ning ni 
 
 jarai sende fd nem bained kuna. 
 akkoi atambdba dard, amiir ambaba 
 
 gonanga aniau eutausdsi as'oru akauau 
 
 anginda kuud aloakdnga.
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 61 
 
 Ilaussa. 
 
 21. amma da ya tshe da shi obil nayi 
 suniifi ga Allah da gaba garelva ba n 
 kiimma kainmiita ba akyirra ni da 
 nka ba. 
 
 22. amma oba yatshe da barud nsa, ku 
 kau riga neggeri, kusa masa da ku 
 sa masa sol)e ga faritshi nsa da 
 takelme da kafafu nsa. 
 
 23. kukau kibbatatshe maraki ku kashi 
 shi da mutshi mu yi murna. 
 
 24. dong wouga ddna ya mutu da yayi 
 rai kiimma da yagbatshe da anganeshi 
 da suka fara murna. 
 
 25. amma ua uasa shinatshlki n naki' 
 da yakdmo yayi kusa da gida ya 
 ji bushe-bushe da raua. 
 
 2G. da ja kyirra daea ga barua, ya tam- 
 baea sa mi uoddan ga abubua akkoi. 
 
 27. amma ya tshe da shi kane nka 
 yasakka da oba ka ya kashi kibbatat- 
 she marekidong ya sama sa da lafia. 
 
 28. amma yayi fiishi da ba shina s6 
 yashigga ba. oba nsa fa ya fitto ya 
 kjirra shi. 
 
 29. amma yaamsa yatshe daobansa* 
 dubi', shiekaru nana inaji maka 
 barantaka dadai inagbada duka nka 
 ba kabaui da n akuia ba dong enyi 
 murna da abokai ua. 
 
 30. amma uonnan da nka uonda ya 
 gbdda dukiiika ga fariknna ya sakka 
 ha ka shi ma sa kibbatatshe mareki. 
 
 31. amma ya tshe da shi. da' kana tar^ 
 da ni da komi nana uaka ne. 
 
 32. amma ya kainmata yi murna da 
 gudda, doDg kane nka shi ya mutu da 
 yayi rai kiimma da ya gbada da 
 anganeshi. 
 
 Emffhedesie. 
 I's'S'e kena se aidenu as'enob ambilbad 
 irrinkoi daro I'ndenan mangiua dard' 
 isiikkoi keroi saudiin en iss'eo. 
 
 baba kenan bainese- S'au kete tubbulu 
 guma dtinasd tiibbulu danase anaded 
 kona lengi danase tagmes an keio- 
 kuna. 
 
 S'aukete haul ro guma oianga irrin uai 
 irrin kiiluf. 
 
 annes abiin amma afuna* ga dere gona 
 nga ishinshi kiiluf. 
 
 am bere bara fare kuna ga yakate hogii 
 n gere ammo funiis funus yose inde'g- 
 gaini. 
 
 akiau kata baina ahandanga mi kioki 
 aroha. 
 
 bainakena se* ankaina nin kai nete nim 
 baba aui aru maniute danga kuma 
 nga el rafia. 
 
 amniau miirmurse asuk kul anhur 
 ambtiba n hogii ambaba honii keti 
 kiauau ga an is'e jeni akenan baba-se. 
 basse- giri maige ai-bara niingoi kuna 
 attedan hairiinbara ka nisse kon arai 
 hanki neji dangau ai kiiluf mefan- 
 dan an keraien. 
 
 nen I's'S'e ro aruennen da ni'u elmang 
 
 uaiyd daro at^ masonu yase aru ma 
 
 niute. 
 ambiiba kena se* dungane handangard 
 
 agnoenne ka luin oiiuaiki. 
 atiikken di'ru kiiluf aff'o, aunin kain' 
 
 abiin ga sifuna ahiinna ga dere irr^- 
 
 gond katii nga. 
 
 THE LORDS PRAYER. 
 
 oba mu wonda ke tshiki n bissa; suna 
 
 nka shi is limma keao keawa ; 
 sarauta nka ta na sakkua ; yirda nka 
 
 akayi kaman tshiki n bi'ssa hakkaua 
 
 tshiki 11 dunia. 
 bamu yau tshiina da kuhim. 
 yafe mamu sunubainiu kaman damn 
 
 kayafe masii woddtinda sukayi mamu 
 
 sunubai 
 kiidda kakaimu tshiki n rndi amma 
 
 katshiei tshiemu daga mugu. 
 dong sarauta takatshe da alhorma da 
 abada abada amin. 
 
 irrim baba ro bere b<5ne niiumia atikki 
 
 ka 
 nynko koitere. 
 iiyn tamdro robere b(5nc, minjida diiunia 
 
 kona. 
 m'rua s'acs'eni ua n el kiik. 
 abesire yafimu irrinkoi neusurufurus^ 
 
 irrenaes'enu masero irrisuriif. 
 
 irriukoi yogasiri d'ebber6 futii. 
 
 danga nynko koitere indaninne dareja 
 har dynien tonii nikembord.
 
 62 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 Notes. 
 
 [This is a copy of the Answer which the Sultan of ^Akadez sent to the Commander 
 of El Nur*", Lusu'^, and all the ''Keilowi's,] 
 
 In the name of God, the merciful, the compassionate. Prayer to hira for the ex- 
 cellent Propliet, his family, and his excellent companions ! 
 
 From the Commander'', the Minister'' of the Sultan, 'Abd-el Kadir, son of the 
 Sultan, Mohammed el Bakin', to the heads of the families^ of all the tribe of ''El 
 Niir, and 'Hamed, and Cei's, and all those among you who ''have large possessions, 
 perfect peace be to you. 
 
 Your eloquence, thanks, and information are deserving of praise. We have seen 
 the auxiliaries sent to us by your tribe', and we have laboured diligently with them 
 against the marauders'" who impede the kafilahs of the poor", and the frequenting 
 of the road of those who travel and of those who remain at home. On this account 
 we desire to receive aid from you against their incursions" [ghazahj. The people 
 of the Keil Fadayi t, they are the marauders."" We should not have forbidden their 
 chiefs to exercise rule over them'' except for three things : 1st, Because they will fly 
 from Ani'kel to Wulumudun, [Wuldmudun, i. e. the Tribe of Mudun ;] 2ndly, That 
 they may not make an alliance with them against us, for they are all marauders'" ; 
 and 3rdly, On this account, that you approve of this act of retribution'' against 
 them. Come then to us quickly. You know that^ " what the hand holds [comes] 
 from its following the fingers, for without the fingers the hand can seize nothing." 
 
 We therefore will expect your determination [to come], that is to say your com- 
 ing after the departure of the salt [^kafilah] of the 'Itisan, fixed among you [for] 
 the 1.5th day of the month. "Godt (Jod is merciful andanswereth prayer ! Come 
 therefore to us, and we will bare our arms" and drive away the ""marauders, and 
 fight valiantly against tliem as God (be He glorified !) hath commanded. 
 
 ^" Lo ! corruption hath multiplied on the face of the earth !" May the Lord^ not 
 question us on account of the poor and needy, orphans and widows, according to his 
 word, ''" Ye are all shepherds, and ye shall all be questioned respecting your flock, 
 whether ye have indeed taken good care of it, or dried it up."^ 
 
 Delay not therefore, but hasten to our abode where we are all assembled, for 
 '*"'* diligence is the duty of all ;" or send thy messenger to us quickly with a posi- 
 tive answer ; send thy messenger as soon as possible. '"''Farewell ! 
 
 Note. — This letter is written in barbarous Arabic, and many passages may 
 admit of different interpretations. 
 
 The names and foreign words are expressed in the Latin character, according to 
 Sir William Jones's system of orthography, generally adopted and used in the Geo- 
 graphical Journal. It is very easily recollected, and enables the reader to pro- 
 nounce the words correctly, and write them in the original character without diffi- 
 culty or error. It consists in uniformly expressing each sound by the same symbol, 
 giving to the vowels the sound they have in Italian, German, Spanish, &c., and to 
 the consonants the power they have in English, except when no such sounds occur 
 in the English language, as in the Greek or German ch, here kh, and those peculiar 
 sounds to which ours only approximate, which are distinguished by a point above 
 or below the similar letter, d, t, s, s, z, z, &c. 
 
 "^Ahadez, pronounced Agadez, is here seen for the first time in its proper form. 
 None of the Arab writers hitherto accessible mention this place, unless it be Ibn 
 Khaldiin, whose history of the Beraber [pronounced Brc'ber] has just issued from 
 the press at Algiers. 
 
 i" Pronounced En Niir. 
 
 "" Eiisu : perhaps it should be Liisu. The negroes generally point their Arabic 
 words, and have rarely any knowledge of the difference between long and short 
 syllables. The quiescent vowel letters are therefore usually omitted by them. 
 
 '' As Dr. Barth writt'S Keilowee, he perhaps meant Kailowi; but we have Kelowee 
 below (with a final vowel in the original copy\ which seems to show Keilowi to be 
 right. 
 
 ' The Emir.
 
 Missioji to Central Africa. 63 
 
 f The Emin. Emm is sometimes a proper name, Imt here it is evidently a title 
 given to the Emir el Nur, Commander of the Tribe of El Niir, and a Governor or 
 \'iceroy (Emi'n) of his district under the Sultan of Akadez. 
 
 ^ The heads, &c. Dr. Barth says in a note that this passage was rendered illegible 
 in the original by having been wetted. The only difficult word in his copy is 
 kamikik or kasikili', for which kabi'liyat has been substituted as an intelligible and 
 possible reading, though kabayil (spelt habyle by Shaw) is the proper Arabic 
 plural of kabileh (tribe), the term generally used by the Berbers. 
 
 '"' The tribe of El Niir," in the original aulad-el-nur, i.e. the " children* of 
 light," probably the names of an Arab tribe, or of the first Berber tribe who em- 
 braced Islam. 
 
 ' Hamed for Ahmed is very common in Barbary. 
 
 ^ The word here used has been evidently mistranscribed. It probably should be 
 el mulaharrabin, " the near neighbours," or " those on whom you have influence." 
 
 ' Literally " from among your children." 
 
 " Literally "men constantly at war," i. e, the predatory Berbers who are always 
 lying in wait for kafilahs. 
 
 " Perhaps Fakirs, i. e. poor pilgrims and santons. 
 
 ° Ghazdh or yJiazdt is a sudden inroad, aforai/, generally for the purpose of ob- 
 taining slaves, gh is sounded like the Northumbrian r in Barbary. 
 
 P This passage is obscure, and may perhaps mean " we should not have prohibited 
 their ruling over their people." 
 
 '^ Aljezi, " their being compelled to make restitution," or perhaps, "their being 
 punished as they deserve." 
 
 ■■ A proverb which would probably be found in Al Meidaui. 
 
 * Kafilah, corrupted by some writers into caffla, is the Arabic word expressing 
 the Persian kar-ravan now commonly used by the Syrian Arabs. 
 
 ' The salt kafilah of the Itisan is the same as that of the Keil-geris, whose de- 
 parture from'Akade'z on its road to Bilmah has been already mentioned. The 
 Sultan of the Itisan himself sometimes accompanies this kafilah, and it seems probable 
 that this name is mentioned on account of the higher nobility of this tribe, in pre- 
 ference to that of the more powerful Keil-geris. — B. Itisan seems from Dr. Barth's 
 note to be another name of the Keil-geris, a Berber tribe. Were the word Arabic, 
 it might be " al tisan, " the goats." 
 
 " The text here is doubtful. It appears to be Allah a-l-m, i. e. Allah latif, muji'b, 
 mystical letters prefixed to some chapters in the Koran. However, it may he 
 Allah ! Allah ! "■ O God ! O God !" 
 
 " Literally, "tuck up our sleeves." 
 
 ^ This is probably one of the Hadith or traditional sayings of the Prophet, as it 
 is not a quotation from the Koran. 
 
 ^ That is, neglected to milk the sheep that they may grow fat. 
 
 "''Jihad. " Diligence in the advancement of religion." See Koran, ix. 24, 41. 
 Sale's Version, p. 151, 15.5. 
 
 ^^ Literally " Salvation be to you." 
 
 R. 
 
 Second Letter from Dr. Barth to Dr. Beke. 
 
 Kanc5, February 23, 1851. 
 Without stopping to give any personal news, which you will doubtless hear from 
 another quarter, I proceed at once to acquaint you with the result of my researches 
 at this place, which would indeed have been much more extensive, if my material 
 circumstances, in conjunction witii a little sickness, had not taken up a good deal of 
 my time. 
 
 The present Sultan of the Fellani empire, or the Emir el Miimenim, Ali ben 
 Bello, is represented as a man whose whole endeavour is only to amass riches— an 
 
 * d has been accidentally omitted at the end of Auldd. 
 t These are under the special authority of the Sultan. — B.
 
 64 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 example which is strictly followed hy his officers. But as he never visits his pro- 
 vinces, and as the communication with them is very precarious, the governors are 
 very independent, the office of some of them having even hecome hereditary. 
 
 The Sultan himself is said to be able to collect a force of ten thousand horse. The 
 name of the present Gedddo is Abdii. 
 
 Among the governors, who equally adopt the title of Sultan, — 1. The Governor 
 of Kano has the greatest power, on account of the market, which enables him to 
 send ten thousand cowries daily to Sakatii for the household of the Sultan. The 
 name of the present Sultan of Kano is Othman ben Ibrahim Dabo, but his brother, 
 the Galadima, has in fact greater influence and power, so that in reality there are 
 at present two Governors, each of whom requires a considerable present. The 
 Governor, who is said to have formerly had a force of 10,000 horse, is now not 
 able to collect more than 7000. 
 
 2. The second, as regards real power, after the Governor of Kano, is, as I am 
 informed, Ibrahim ben Yakiiba, the Governor of JJoshi, or Bautshi, who has his 
 residence at Yakoba ; for although he has a force of only 2000 horse, his troops of 
 archers, the best known in Sudan, are numberless. 
 
 3. The third rank belongs to the Governor of Zegzeg, Mohammed Sani, who re- 
 sides at Zaria. He has about 3000 horse, and numbers of archers. Zegzeg is a 
 province of great extent. 
 
 4. Loiil, the Governor of the extensive province of Adamawa, comes next, who 
 has his residence at Yola. Besides a large army of archers, he has a force of 2000 
 horse. 
 
 5. The next in power is Hammedu, the Governor of Khad^dscha, who has a force 
 of ahout 2000 horse. 
 
 G. Next to him is Mohammed Bello ben Mallem Romaro, the Governor of 
 Katshiia, with a force of not much more than 1000 horse. Katshna, on account 
 of its vicinity to the hostile countries of Maradeh and Gober, has greatly declined. 
 
 7. Rather more powerful is Abd er Rahman, the Sultan of Katdgum, who is said 
 to bring 1500 horse into the field. 
 
 8. Next to him in power may be considered Yerima Ahraedu, the Governor of 
 Mesaiu, who is said to have 1000 horse at his command. 
 
 9. Then follows Harder Lemima, the blind old Governor oi Mar mar, who resides 
 at Naenawa ; his former residence, Birni-u-Gorno, having been destroyed by the 
 Bornuese. He is said to have about 700 horse. 
 
 10. The tenth rank seems to be occupied by Ismaela, the Governor oi Shera, 
 brother of Abd er Rahman 'of Kata^um, with not more than 500 horse. 
 
 11. Then follows Koranga, the Governor of Bohi'ru, having his residence at the 
 place of the same name, with about (jOO horse. 
 
 The 12th, and last of all, is the freebooting Governor of the ruined province of 
 Daura, a man bearing the same name as the Governor of Katshna, Mohammed 
 Bello, who, though he has but 400 horse, is feared by all his neighbours. 
 
 Besides these twelve Governors, who receive their orders directly from Sakatii, 
 there is the Governor of Zan/aia, named Ahmedu, who, as the cousin of the 
 Sultan, enjoys almost the same rights as the above-mentioned persons. He resides 
 at Bakiira, and is in command of a force of 300i) to 4000 horse. 
 
 In addition to the foregoing, there are still two important provinces belonging to 
 the Fellanis, Ni/ffi and Ali/dri, as Yauri is commonly called ; but they do not, 
 like the others, pay tribute to the Sultan of Sakatii, but to Khalili, the Sultan 
 of Gondu, and grandson of the conqueror Othman dan Fodi by his son Abd- 
 allahi. 
 
 The present Governor of Ali/dri is named Thita. He resides at Afasa, and is 
 able to bring into the field 5000 horse. The name of the present Sultan of Aj(^j 
 is Masiiba, who resides at Ladi, the present capital ; Raba having been destroyed 
 by the Fellanis about five years ago, when it rebelled against them. The Governor 
 of Nyffi has about 2000 horse. 
 
 The court at Sakatii consists of nine persons. The next person after the Sultan, 
 or Governor-serki, is the Galadima, his first minister, and the natural Vice- 
 Governor, a person sometimes of greater authority than the Governor himself. 
 Next follow the Serkidawokki, who has the command of all the horse in Kano; 
 th.' Hurfla-n-Kano, the chief or general who leads the army ; the Al-Kiili or prin- 
 cipal judge ; the Tshiroman Kano, who exercises the power in the southern part
 
 Mission to Central Africa. G5 
 
 of the province; the Serki-n-naye, who has the northern part of the province 
 under his authority ; the Gado or minister of the treasiir) ; and finally, the Serki- 
 n-Shiino, literally the master of the oxen ; the oxen as the principal carriers of 
 lusgage in Sudan being an important part of a court or army in this country. 
 When the Sultan leaves the place for any length of time, accompanied by bis first 
 minister and his captains, the Gad(l and the berki-n-Shuno have the authority. 
 
 I now proceed to give a short account. of the quarters and the gates of' the toum of 
 Kami, which Clapperton, though he made such a long stay here, has not, as far as 
 I am aware, made known. In enumerating the different quarters of the town, I 
 shall begin from the mountain named Dab'i, the most characteristic feature of the 
 town, at the southern foot of which the houses commence, stretching down towards 
 the S. with very irregular outskirts. From this point I shall proceed eastwards, 
 returning afterwards to the W., and so on. In this order the names of the 
 quarters are as follows : — Dala, Kutumbaw, Gerke, Madabo, Yantandu, Adakawa, 
 Koki Seta, Limantshi. Then turning S. to W., Yandoea, Jibji'n, Yellabu, another 
 Limantshi with a large mosque, Masukiani, Tuddum-Makera, Yamrotshe, Mara- 
 rababokoi, Baki-n-rua, Runfawa, Yellua. Next, turning again towards the 
 E., llimangirajire, Msiggoga, Maggogi, Unguankarf, Dendali-n-Ware, another 
 Limantshi, Dukkurana, Riiffogi', De'rma. 
 
 All these quarters are principally, if not exclusively, inhabited by the Hab€, and 
 they all lie to the N. of the Jakara, the ill-famed waterpool> which separates the 
 southern half of the town from the northern ; while the following quarters are 
 almost exclusively inhabited bi/ Fellanis : — Yaale'ria, Marmara, Agadesawa, Yiila 
 (the madiiki-n-Kand), El Kantara, Uaitiikka, Gosherife-Uodo, T6kob;i, Dukkawa, 
 Saghidarnse, Shafushi ; then, returning from E. to W., Sherbale, Madate, Kiirna, 
 Sheshe, Dirmi-Kai-okii, Lekilii-n-lemu, Kullua, Al Hendekf, Sorandinki, Rimi-n- 
 Kijro, Toji (where the palace of the Governor is), Yarkasa, Mandauan', another 
 Marmara with the surname of Dantiirku, Sabsansara, Kudedefawa, Jingo, Dosaei, 
 Warure, Gau, Kurmawa, Hawsawa, Ungua Makama, Galadantshi, Shuriimtshi 
 (where the elder son of the Governor, or the Shuromo, lives), Yesserki. Kurmawa, 
 Kusserua, Udelawa (lying S. of the palace), Rimi-n-kersi, Karakd, Dugcrawa, 
 Yiikase, Nasserawa, Abdelawa. 
 
 The importance of these ditferent quarters of Kano is the greater as in some cases 
 they are entirely separated from one another by the spacious places or the numerous 
 quarries which interrupt the groups of houses. Of the whole character of the 
 town, which is indeed quite picturesque and interesting on account of the number 
 of palm and other trees waving over its surface, I will not say a word, but will 
 merely mention the gates in the extensive town-wall, which, like that of Katshna 
 and Zaria, leaves a very wide open space, in some directions two miles in extent, 
 round the to^n. The names of the gates, going from N. to W. and round from S. 
 to E., are as follows : — Kofa Masu'ger, Kofa-n-riia leading to Zinder, Kufa-n-adilma, 
 K()fa gndan leading to Katshna, Kofa Kansiikkeli on the direct road to Sakatii, 
 K()fa K;iboga, Kofa-n-diikania on the road to Zaria, Kofa gadan Kaia, K()fa Kura 
 leading to Katah, Kofa daagiindi, Kofa nassarawa, Kofa uauibai on the direct road 
 to Bornii, and Kofa mata. These gates are shut every night and opened every 
 morning; while the gate called Tawaieu Kofa (the gate of the enemies) is walled 
 up, because, as they say, a prince, who left the town by that gate, died, but, as the 
 name seems to indicate, because the enemy — the Fellanis — made their entrance 
 by it. 
 
 Subjoined is a register of the towns and larger villages belonging to the province 
 of Kano: — 
 
 Of Towns surrounded bji an earth-irall, the houses being built partly of earth and 
 partly of hashish, there are the following: — Jin'ma, Gerki', Sankara, Yafen, Ri'n- 
 gim, Diishi, Gaea, Ge'rko, Dell, Udil, Tawra, Kura, Sakkua, Hebeji, Rimiingado, 
 Dawaki, Godia, Bishi, Gezana, Ziikerc', Killi, Maejia, Mega, Merke, Takai, San- 
 gaia, (Jogeni, and Faniso. 
 
 {)i laiijir villages I learned the following names: — Ungogo, Dawilno, Zabenawa, 
 Gezc', Wottaii, Gora, Miidobr, Salanta, Ammagua, Dadi-n-diinia, Gabezana, Doko, 
 Quinkealla, Daiigaiamc, Gnrjana, Zungo-n-Killi, Abegilni, Sakkua-n-Komboto, 
 Ziingo, Gezi, Raliuidlem, Rimen Asbenana, Dawaki, Gano, Rand, Teuneger, Kia- 
 wa, Kaduawa, TakaUifia, Katilkattl, Gazobi (a widely scattered village to the S.), 
 Uansdschia, Gulii, Gani, Tamberawa, Uiihassa, Gorzo, Karaie, Kafi-n-agur, Rnka- 
 
 F
 
 n() Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 dawn, Hoda, Tariiia, Filki, Koki (towards the W.), Dawaki-n-Dambambara, Ka- 
 tdnkatiiiigerawe, Katanga baba, Katiiiiga Ki'iranii, Katkazuba, Mallem-Kuiua, 
 Buukori (with a considerable market), Kayaukilsari, Tudduni I3illane, Ilatsherawa, 
 Yaniniata, Ueme, Denie-n-dank;'irfi, Tuufafi, Kuddadefawa, Zango-n-Daandu, Pa- 
 giukilw, Jajira, Tofa, Dangugua, Zango mala andu, JClli, AL'idatshi, Makode, Kon- 
 shi-n-guarta, Yakase. Tula. The order in which these villages are enumerated 
 is round from the E. by S. to W. 
 
 I. Route from Kand to Adamawa by the way of BosJii. 
 
 1. The first day you arrive early in the forenoon at Sakua, a place situate on a 
 running stream called Kogi-n-Sakua. In the morning you pass the village of 
 Dawaki, 
 
 2nd day. — About dhoJior arrive at Dell, a considerable place, larger than Tasa- 
 wa, after having passed another considerable place, only a little smaller than Dell, 
 called Gerko. The entire country is well cultivated, and there are but few trees on 
 the road. 
 
 3rd day. — Shortly after mid-day you arrive at Parna, situated at the foot of a 
 mountain by the side of a small rivulet. During the morning you pass a village 
 named Gedia, between which and Parna there is some wood. Pai-na is not so 
 large as Dell. 
 
 4th day. — Through a mountainous country covered with wood. At noon you 
 arrive at a place called Tebki, the frontier between the province of Kano and tliat 
 of Boshi. 
 
 5th day. — You arrive early in the morning at Sabangari, a village situated in 
 the plain. After having crossed a small brook near Tebki, your road lies through 
 a well-cultivated country, where the people dwell in scattered huts during the 
 rainy season, while during the dry season they retire to the tops of the mountains. 
 
 <ith day. — You sleep at Saranda, a considerable village situated in the plain, at 
 which place you arrive in the afternoon, after having passed a large mountain on 
 your left. The comitry is well cultivated. Near Saranda you cross a brook. 
 
 7th day. — One hour after mid-day j ou arrive at Yakoba, the capital of Boshi, 
 after passing through a well-cultivated country, covered with scattered villages. 
 The town has twelve gates, and all around the country is extremely fertile ; but 
 there is no running water — only wells. 
 
 8th day. — About noon you arrive at Dutsi-n-Ge're, a large village situated in the 
 plain, by the side of a river which is said to run towards Gabbes (E. ?) 
 
 9tb day. — Arrive at Korallafa, a large straggling village, the Governor of Boshi 
 not allowing the Pagans to collect close together in one spot. There are salt-mines 
 here. The road lies along the valley enclosed by mountains on either side; but 
 the country is well cultivated. 
 
 loth day. — In the afternoon you arrive at Garimmadaki, a large village in the 
 valley-plain, surrounded with mountains on all sides. 
 
 11th day. — You arrive at Ilamarwa, a large village, situated in the plain and 
 inhabited by Fellauis, being on the frontier between the province of Boshi and that 
 of Adamawa. The road lies through an inhabited hilly country, watered by nu- 
 merous rivulets. 
 
 12tli day. — About aser you arrive at a stream running eastward (?) called Baki- 
 n-kogi, where you pass the night. There is no village here, the country being full 
 of elephants, rhinoceroses, and other wild beasts. 
 
 l.'Uli day. — You stop at a considerable place named Zinii, situated on a hill, and 
 watered by a rivulet. The whole country is cultivated. 
 
 14th day. -After having crossed a large mountain covered with trees, you sleep 
 in the village called Diimeshi. The country is well cultivated. The inhabitants 
 are Pagans. 
 
 15th day. — You reach the village named Gida-n-Darawa at the foot of the moun- 
 tain. The cultivated lands are in the valley. 
 
 Kith day. — You pass the night at Gidu-u-Amana, a village built on the hill, while 
 the cultivated grounds are in the valley. 
 
 17th day. — You reach the considerable place called Korallafe, situated on the 
 river BCmie, which runs towards E. (Gabbes) ? and is larger than the Kawara. 
 My informant assures me that it took him several hours to cross this stream. On it
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 07 
 
 there are plenty of boats. According to this man, as well as others whom I ques- 
 tioned on this most important point, the Bimie falls into lake Tshad, running east- 
 ward far from Yula.* 
 
 18tli day. — After a half day's journey (as this travelling is in general), ascending 
 and descending, you reach the village named Bautshi-n-diitsi. 
 
 19th day. — There is no village, but you rest during the night near a large water- 
 tank called baba-n-fadama, in a large forest full of wild beasts. 
 
 20th day. — You reach Gaudu, a village inhabited by the slaves of the mother of 
 the (iovernor of Adamawa. Near the village is a rivulet, which runs towards the N, 
 
 21st daj'. — You reach the end of your journey, Yola, the capital of Adamawa, a 
 large town, situate in a plain and surrounded by a ditch ; but all the houses, except 
 that of the Governor, are built entirely of hashish. In this town, which is inha- 
 bited only by Fellanis and their slaves, there is a considerable market. 
 
 From Yola it is said to be but seven days' journey to the capital of Loggan. 
 
 The road to Adamawa is said to be difficult even for horses. The people them- 
 selves generally carry the luggage on their heads. 
 
 II. Route from Kand to Toto. — Slow travelling, via Katab. 
 
 1st daj'. After passing in the morning the village and rivulet called Baki'-n- 
 Kogi, then another village named Go'ra, and afterwards Madobi, you enter Bebt^i 
 at sunset, first crossing a small rivulet. Bebt-ji is a considerable place, with a 
 market much frequented, at which the Tuaryg sell a considerable portion of their 
 salt. 
 
 2nd. After a short journey of about four hours, and having passed in the 
 morning the village of Kamanda, where there is a rivulet, you reach the large 
 place called Banda, situated at the foot of a rock. The town is surrounded by a 
 nmd wall, and the houses are built of mud in their lower pai-t, while the pointed 
 roof consists of shibki, or the reed of the ghussub. 
 
 3rd. About noon you reach an open village called Pake, situated by a stream of 
 considerable depth, which you must pass in a boat or by swimming. There are 
 some small hamlets on the road, but the country is covered with wood, a small part 
 only being cultivated. 
 
 4th. At noon you reach the place called Kaziiitu, surrounded by a wall, the 
 houses consisting entirely of hashish. There is no village on the road, but the 
 country is open and cultivated. 
 
 .5th. After a short journey of three or four hours you reach Ziutu, a considerable 
 place, surrounded liy an earth wall, and situated on the N. bank of a large stream 
 running eastward. There are two [ferry ?] boats on the river, but no fish. 
 
 (ith. About an hour after midday you reach Kawrii, a large town belonging to 
 the province of Zegzeg, surrounded by an earth wall, and situated on the bank of 
 a considerable river running eastward, on which there arc boats. Tlie whole day's 
 journey through wood. 
 
 7th. At noon you reach the open village called Gidambakaia, inhabited by 
 Pagans, but subjected to the Fellanis. All Ibrest. 
 
 8th. An hour after midday you reach Katab, a large open place, which, on 
 account of the quantity of honey jiroduced here, is called Gari-n-zu'mmua, " honey- 
 town." It belongs likewise to the province of Zegzeg. The houses are constructed 
 entirely of hashish. The country is very fertile, and the crops of ghussub, gha- 
 fiili, cotton, and sesame are plentiful. 
 
 9th. At noon you reach the open village of Madowaki-n-nuitua. belonging also 
 to Zegzeg. There is here much cultivation, but the country begins to become 
 mountainous. 
 
 10th. At noon you reach Jemdar Dararo, a considerable place, surrounded with 
 an earth wall, and belonging to Zegzeg. The inhabitants are partly Fellanis, and 
 partly Pagans. There is a pool of standing water near the town. Mountains, 
 forest, and cultivated lands on the road. 
 
 11th. At noon you reach Kogom, a small village at the foot of a mountain, and 
 inhabited entirely by slaves. Ou the ^V. side of the village there is a large navi- 
 gable river running northwards. The whole journey through wood. 
 
 * Subsequently found to be incorrect. — See pp. G9 and 70.— Ed. 
 
 f2
 
 68 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 12th. At noon you reach the large open village called Guari-n-kurremi, situated 
 in the midst of the forest, which covers the whole country through which you pass. 
 There are no mountains. 
 
 13th. At noon you reach the large place called Toui, surrounded by an earth 
 wall, and belonging to the province of Zegzeg. There are many hamlets on the 
 road, the country being plain and well cultivated. 
 
 14th. About noon you reach Tonummildaki, situated in a valley covered with 
 forest. To the S of the village there are two towns surrounded with mud walls, 
 one being called Toniigwambai. 
 
 15th. A little after midday you reach the small open village called Gulbi-n- 
 tiinkua, situated on the S. bank of a small watercourse running northwards. The 
 whole country is cultivated. 
 
 ICth. At noon jou reach a considerable place, surrounded by an earth wall, 
 called Likuro, which also belongs to the province of Zegzeg. The walls of the 
 houses consist of mud, and their pointed roofs of hashish. The country is laid 
 out in fields, but there are no villages. 
 
 17th. An hour after midday you reach Kafi Awdezanga, a considerable place at 
 the eastern foot of the mountains, and enclosed by an earth wall, the houses con- 
 sisting of mud and hashish. 
 
 ISth. After a short journey of four hours, you reach the village called Yau- 
 karde'-zango. 
 
 19th. Early in the forenoon you reach Guagua, a place surrounded by an earth 
 wall. The country a little mountainous. 
 
 20th. In the morning reach Bukoko. 
 
 21st. About noon reach Basa, a large place in a mountainous country. 
 
 22nd. About noon reach Gorgundara, a large walled town belonging to Zegzeg, 
 situated in the plain. The inhabitants, who are not mixed with Fellanis, have a 
 peculiar language. 
 
 23rd. At noon reach Wari, a large open place. The whole country is plain and 
 cultivated. 
 
 24th. An hour after midday reach the village called Kargo. The country plain, 
 covered with wood. 
 
 25th. Early in the forenoon reach Gwari-n-Kargo, a village situated at the side 
 of a rivulet, which runs northward into the Kudiina. Here the extensive province 
 of Zegzeg terminates. The country mostly cultivated, a little wood. 
 
 26th. At noon reach the open village called Basa, in a plain country. All culti- 
 vated. 
 
 27th. Reach at the same hour Ongol Limaug, inhabited by the people of the 
 Prince Limang. Between the rocks there is a streamlet. 
 
 28th. An hour after midday arrive at Toto, a large town protected towards the 
 W. by a forest, and on the other sides by an earth wall. The houses are built, as 
 the larger places usually are, of earth and hashish. Toto belongs to an independent 
 prince named Limang, who is said to be very powerful, particularly on account 
 of the number of musketeers in his ."iervice. He wages war successfully against the 
 Fellanis, none of whom are allowed to enter his town. 
 
 In addition lo this itiuerai'y, I had b.'gun to write n shorter one of onlij seventeen 
 daijs, according to a man who was long in company with Abdallah (Clapperton) on 
 his second journey, and is a son of his host, Haj Hat Salah ; but this man, whose 
 name is Ibrahi'ma, left suddenly for Zinder while I was ill. He follows a straighter 
 course without passing through Katab, as that i)lacedoes not lie on the direct route. 
 
 Leaving the direct route (as given above) at Kawrd. ((ith Day) — 
 
 a. You reacli one hour after midday Kefuro, a walled town, situated at the western 
 foot of a large mountain. The whole road is covered with wood. 
 
 ?). An hour after midday you reach Kiirremiu Usseman, a large straggling village 
 in a hollow excavated by the water. In the morning you cross a small rivulet 
 running westward. 
 
 V. At about the same hour you arrive at a small hamlet called Rimi. The whole 
 road through wood. 
 
 d. In the forenoon reach a large straggling village called Sensannin Jaba, which 
 owes its origin to the Fellanis. To the W. of the village is a small river running 
 westward.
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 69 
 
 e. About two hours after midday reach Koro, a large open place in a jilain, but 
 surrounded by raouutains towards the N., E., and W, 
 
 /. In tlie forenoon arrive at Jammaa, a large open place of the Fellanis, situated 
 in a large plain. Many farms. The whole day's journey lies through a valley- 
 plain, with mountains on either side, those to the W. being called Kare. 
 
 g. About user you reach the large place called Dararo. 
 
 ^. In the forenoon arrive at Madaki-n-gai. 
 
 i. One hour and a half after midday arrive at Ishe. 
 
 k. A little before aser reach a small village called Goagallada. 
 
 I. At noon reach a small village called Kulgu. 
 
 m. About aser arrive at Abaje. 
 
 n. In the forenoon reach Gidan-n-mataue'. 
 
 o. At noon arrive at Toto. 
 
 Route from Toto to Egga on the River Kwara, according to the some 
 informant, Ibrahima. 
 
 1st day. In the morning you arrive at Zango-n-kara, a place belonging to Nyffi 
 The road lies through a valley, in part wooded. 
 
 2nd. One hour after midday reach Agaia, a large walled town belonging to the 
 province of Zegzeg. The country well cultivated, with many scattered hamlets. 
 Soon after leaving Z<ingo-n-kara you cross the river Gurma running northward, 
 on wliich there are two [ferry ?] boats. 
 
 3rd. At aser reach a place named Kurremi, not so large as Agaia, but surrounded 
 by two enclosures, one of wooil and the other of earth. There is here a small river 
 called Kuddiiba running westward, but not navigable. 
 
 4th. One hour after midday arrive at Ztingane Edrisu, a large open village 
 situated on the bank of the Kwara. The country is open and well cultivated. 
 
 5th. In half a day you reach, in a boat, Egga, a town situated on an island in the 
 Kwara, with a market, which is held on elevated ground in the middle of the town. 
 
 Rivers tributaiy to the Kwara on its ■ eastern side, in the provinces of Yauri 
 and Nyffi, according to tJie same Ibrahima. 
 
 1. The Tshuso, descending from Kabbi. 
 
 2. The Gindi, which joins the former, having its sources near Zaufara. 
 
 3. The Wonketshia, rising in the middle of Nyffi. 
 
 4. The Kadiina, coming from Zaria. 
 
 5. The Gurara, coming from Dsaba. 
 (). The Miitsirga, from Banikai, 
 
 7. The Rill, from Gondara. 
 
 8. The Bemie, which my informant is unable to trace beyond the town of 
 Yakoba.* 
 
 Two Routes to Adamawa. 
 
 Kuka, April 12, 1851, 
 My first informant, whose acquaintance is of great value to me, belongs to the 
 Shurfa Ueled Bu-Seba, who live partly in the neighbourhood of Menikesh and 
 partly in the Wadi Sakiet-el-hamra, south of Wadl Noon, together with the 
 Ueled Delaim. My other informant belongs to that section which inhabits Sakiet- 
 el-hamra, and his name is Ahmedu Bel Majiib. He has been five times to 
 Adamawa. 
 
 From Yakoba through Adamawa to the Pagans; the first seven days S.£., 
 
 then due S. 
 
 1st day. Arrive, at about 1 p.m., at Ktiddera, a place of middle size, entirely 
 built of ghussub-straw, and situated on a wadi', which, according to the nssertiou of 
 my informant (disputed by me in vain), is the beginning of the Yaw,t the tributary 
 of Lake Tshad. The country is plain and well cultivated. 
 
 * See p. G7. — Ed. f Yeo, in Bornuesc, means River. — Ei>.
 
 iy) Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 2nd. About ascr arrive at Maiktma, a village iuhabited by Moslems. Pass many 
 villages. Pleuty of running water. 
 
 3rd. Between 1 and 2 p.m., Matshijo, situated on a hill, and inhabited by Pagans. 
 Besides durra and gbussub, the people have plenty of cotton, of which they make 
 ge'bbega for the Sultan of Eoshi ; and yet they are not clothed, but go quite 
 naked, having the entire face tattooed. The country is hilly. 
 
 4th. Between 2 and 3 p.m. reach Maimenluio, a small straggling village in a 
 hilly country, inhabited by Pagans. The country is almost wholly covered with 
 wood, much infested by elephants. 
 
 mh. In the forenoon reach liogussa, situated on a deep narrow streamlet running 
 to the river Benue. 
 
 Gth. In the forenoon reach Gari'-u-serki-n-Kudda (not the native name, but so 
 called by the people of Haussa), a village situated at the S.W. foot of the moun- 
 taiu, and iuhabited by Moslems, while on the top of the mountain there dwell 
 Pagans. To the N. of the road are mountains. 
 
 7th. In the forenoon, Jebjeb, the frontier place of the province of Boshi, where 
 salt is found of excellent quality and of a reddish colour. The country is not well 
 cultivated. 
 
 8th. In the forenoon, Bume'uder (called Baki-n-Kogi by the people of Haussa), 
 situated on the Benue, on which river there are many boats. Salt is found in great 
 plenty. The inhabitants are Moslems, and are clothed. Hanidrrua, the residence 
 of Sultan Mohammed, is at a short distance. According to my informant, this 
 Sultan is under the direct command of the Sultan of Sokotu (which is the right 
 pronunciation of Sakatii). 
 
 9th. Encamp near the Pagan Kuauas, on the bank of the river Benue, which, 
 according to my informant, is about 2(.i00 yards broad. The people have a great 
 many barks for crossing the river. The Koanas are large of stature, surpassing all 
 my informant ever saw. 
 
 loth. About 1 P.M. arrive at the dwellings of the Pagans, called Amana Barka. 
 The whole road through a plain bordered by mountains. 
 
 1.3th. In the morning arrive at the residence of Sultan Tshehshi, a Pagan prince, 
 after having slept two nights in the open air. For, though the country, which is 
 level, is inhabited, travellei-s avoid the Pagans. On the third day the plain is 
 interrupted by high mountains, covered with trees, and is thickly inhabited. 
 
 1 5th. About 1 P.M. reach Sultan Ytiga, after having slept one night in the open air. 
 The whole country is mountainous; and the inhabitants, who live on the tops of 
 the. mountains, are quite naked. They live on masr — the Egyptian durra. 
 
 18th. Arrive at Kiintsha, the residence of the governor Mohammed Gabdu, a 
 Fellan, who is subject to the Sultan of Adamawa. The place is large, but the 
 houses are entirely of hashish, with the exception of that of the governor, which is 
 built of earth. The town is situated on a river, which in the dry season is ford- 
 able, but cannot be crossed in the rains without a boat. It is tributary to the Fiiro, 
 which runs into the Benue. The two preceding nights are passed in the Khalia, 
 though the country is thickly inhabited by Pagans, m ho live on the tops of the 
 mountains. Mohammed Gdbdu is said to have not less than U),000 slaves. From 
 this place you turn a little to the W., continuing S.S.W. 
 
 19th. Arrive at Maileggel, keeping along the river, which is to your left. The 
 country is well cultivated by the slaves of the Sultan of Kuntsha, w ho inhabit the 
 place. There ai'e mountains on both sides of the road, but at some distance. 
 
 20th. A village of the slaves of Jorofdngel, situated on a hill. 
 
 21st. Joroflingel, a place of middling size, built by a Fellani governor of that 
 name, who resides here, being dependent on the Sultan at Yola. On the march 
 you haTC mountains, whicli, from what I can make out, seem not to form con- 
 tinuous ranges, but rather to be isolated. Before reaching Jorofiingel you cross a 
 river, which by Arab travellers generally, and by my informant, is called nis-el- 
 m;i, and is represented as being the origin of the Benue. It is a stone's throw in 
 width, and is crossed on a sort of raft. My informant is well aware that the Be'nue 
 runs into the Kwara,* and not into Lake Tshad ; but unfortunately he does not 
 remember the precise name which the river bears here. 
 
 * S<.>e p. 67.— Ed.
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 71 
 
 22nd. A village of the Bsikr Ycmyem, a section of the ill-famed Ycniyem, who 
 have ol)tained the name of Bakr from a Felluni of that name who rules over them. 
 These people (as was proved many years ago) really do eat human flesh ; hut 
 where subjected to the Fellanis they are not now allowed to enjoy their favourite 
 food. The place is situated on a considerable navigable river tributary to the 
 Ben lie. 
 
 23rd. Maibe'li, a small place situated on the same river farther up, and inhabited 
 by Fellanis and Pagans. The people, who possess plenty of cattle, live on milk and 
 dukhen. About a day and a half still further up the river, to the S.S.E., is a large 
 walled town called Tumbtiti, the residence of Sultan Mohammed Sombo. The 
 entire country is thickly inhabited. Maibe'li is the frontier place of the territories 
 of the Fellanis towards the S S.W. ; for the Pagans farther S. only pay the jezia, 
 or ransom money, in order not to be molested by razzias. 
 
 24th. You enter the territory of the Tekfir Pagans, who, like the Yemyem, relish 
 human flesh, placing the heads of those whom they have devoured (their enemies) 
 as ornaments on the top of the palace or dwelling of their king. But their ordinary 
 food is masr and dukhen. Of ghussub they have but little ; cotton there is none. The 
 Tekdr perforate their nostrils, some passing rings through the orifice, while others 
 do not. They live in holes underground. The whole of their country, in which 
 my informant marched ten days, is plain, there being only wadls and slight eleva- 
 tions. It is watered by small rivulets, but there is no large river ; and it is shaded 
 by the banana and gonda tree. The gonda is the most common tree in all Ada- 
 mawa, but farther N. the banana is not known. During the last five or six days 
 he saw the goro and the hanoriiii in great plenty. After ten days' march — S.S.W., 
 S.W. — my informant came to 
 
 34th. The frontier of the Je'tem Pagans, who go naked, and are armed with guns, 
 but scarcely know how to use them. Their country is hilly, being at no great dis- 
 tance from the sea-coast. My informant was told that the roads leading from the 
 palace of their Sultan are covered with sheep-skins for a distance of half a day's 
 journey. They use cowries. 
 
 W. (?) of the J6tem live the Di'ndin, who dwell in trees, which are of so enor- 
 mous a circumference that one tree is capable of holding ten huts. The weapons of 
 the Dindin are said to consist of nothing but sticks and clubs, which they throw 
 with great dexterity from their trees. The Dindin border on Bafu, where is found 
 the tukuruii. From the Jt^tem to Ke'ttofo is three days' journey. 
 
 From Kurdslm to Yula, direction E. 
 
 1st day. About aser arrive at Ldru, inhabited by Fellani, The road winds 
 along between high mountains, in which springs are very plentiful. The moun- 
 tains are inhabited by Pagans, while the Fellani with their cattle occupy the 
 valleys. 
 
 3rd. Arrive at a village situated at the foot of a hill, and at no great distance 
 from Zengi, a place inhabited by Fellanis. You sleep one night in the Khalla. 
 The country is much infested by elephants. 
 
 4th. Keach a tributary of the river Faro, called Baki-n-Kogi by the p?ople of 
 Haussa, and Bahr Hamilu by the Arab merchants. The country, which is inhabited 
 by the slaves of the Fellan, is much infested by elephants, as al>o by the large 
 antelope called by the Arabs bagr-el-wahsh. 
 
 5th. Reach a place called Iliimidu, inhabited by Fellanis. 
 
 Gth. Between 1 and 2 o'clock p.m. you arrive at Yola, a large open place, and a 
 sort of distant suburb of the large town of Giiren, in which the Sultan of Adamawa 
 does not reside on account of the razzias made by the Pagans. Yola is situated in 
 an extensive plain, which is well cultivated. There is plenty of indigo; hut salt 
 is dear, one ass-load often fetching four slaves. Indeed, slaves are a cheap article 
 of merchandise in Adamawa; and with a turkedie— worth about three-quarters of 
 a dollar in Kano— you may often buy a slave. Ivory is likewise very cheap ; and, 
 according to the state of the market" you may buy the largest elcphant's-tooth for 
 one or two turkedies. In Yola cowries are not current, and the merchants pur- 
 chase everything with turkedies and merjawtiddu — small yellow glass-beads from 
 Venice. Yo'la is situated on the Faro, a considerable river, which receives all the 
 small rivulets in which this country abounds, and is not passable except in boats.
 
 72 Mission to Central Ajrica. 
 
 I was surprised at learniug so important a fact, as my previous informant, who (as 
 I have told you) bad been only once to Yola, was not at all aware of it. But my 
 new authority, besides being a very intelligent man. Las made long and repeated 
 sojourns in Adamawa. 
 
 Uu the same authority I add 
 
 The direct Route from Hamdnud to Yula. 
 
 2nd day. Zengi. All the country inhabited. 
 
 3rd. Start from Zengi in the evening, travelling the whole night in order to 
 avoid the fei-ocious Pagans, who during the night remain quiet, but kill all who 
 venture to traverse their country by daylight. In the morning arrive at Taheru, 
 or rather a place governed by Tahe'ru, and dependent on Yula. 
 
 4th. Arrive at a place of middling size, inhabited by Fellanis and governed by 
 Haj For. On the road you pass isolated mountains. 
 
 .5th. Yola. According to the same experienced traveller, it is a joui-ney of only 
 fifteen days from Yula to Kuka ; seven days from Yula to the northern frontier- 
 town of Adamawa, called Jemnulra, the governor of which is Abd-Alhihi ; from 
 thence three days to Mora, the capital of Maudara, which is five long days' journey 
 from Kuka. My friend was informed that the shortest road from the most distant 
 town of Adamawa to Baghirmmi, through the Ajasen, is only four (long) days. 
 This road is now interrupted. The name of Adamawa is said to have been un- 
 known before the time of the Fellanis, the country being named after Adama, a 
 general of Othman dan (bingel, in Fellani, the son of) Fodi the great conqueror. 
 But it is very probable that the kingdom of Haiidama, cited by Ibn Khaldiin, is 
 Adamawa. 
 
 Route from Yola to Baia, according to El Mukhtdr, an Arab of the tribe 
 el Idesan, who live in Bdgena, a large country ten days N. of Sansanding. 
 
 1st day. Gdrin (as this informant pronounced the name), the former capital of 
 the Sultan, inhabited entirely by Mohammedans. Between Yola and Gurin, or 
 Guren, there is no river, the Fi'iro coming from the W., flowing round Gurin on its 
 S. side, and then turning northward towards Yula. Exactly at the bend of the 
 river, on its southern bank, is Bu'nda. Direction S.E. 
 
 2nd. Between 1 and 2 p.m., Laniarda, inhabited by Pagans. The road lies to 
 the left of the Faro, which is crossed, at first setting out, at a ford in the dry season, 
 and in a boat during the rainy season. The country plain — mountains in the dis- 
 tance. You then turn S.W. On the other side of the river is Tshiimba, a large 
 place situated at the foot of the mountains, and inhabited by Fellanis. 
 
 3rd. Encamp near the Bute Pagans, between 1 and 2 o'clock p.m. The country 
 IS mountainous on both sides of the road, the Faro being far oft" to the W. As 
 throughout Adamawa, there is plenty of honey. 
 
 4th. A village of Fellanis, situated on a river ruiming northward into the Fiiro, 
 and called Maie Kolejo. Here resides a governor of the name of Ardo Mohammed. 
 The whole country mountainous. Tiie inhabitants pretend that there is gold here, 
 but that they do not know how to oI)tain it. Arrive between 1 and 2 o'clock p.m. 
 
 5th. Arrive at aser among the Pagans, whose king is called Njarcndi, in the 
 midst of isolated groups of mountains. The whole country under cultivation, the 
 crops consisting of dukhen, durra, koltshi, and cotton. 
 
 (ith. At mughreb reach a Fellani village, whose governor is Joro Kilbdu. The 
 country passed through is mouLtainous. The inhabitants are Pagans, but very 
 well formed. 
 
 7th. Pass the night in the Khalla, among the Pagan slaves of the Fellani. 
 
 8th. Between 11 and noon, Gi'iniden', a walled place, of considerable size for 
 this country, and said to be about the same size as Gummel, built entirely of reeds, 
 with the exception of the house of the governor and the mosque, the former being 
 built of earth, and the latter of earth and reeds. 'I'here is a daily market. 
 
 9tb. Between 1 and 2 p.m. encamp among the slaves of the Fellan. The country 
 is mountainous: rivulets in the valley. 
 
 10th. Other Pagans. Country covered with small villages. 
 
 Uth. At aser encamp near a village of the Umbum, a large well-made tribe of
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 73 
 
 Pagans, who tattoo their bodies, make cuttings in their chins, and sharpen their 
 teeth. They live partly in the valley, and partly on the top of the mountains. 
 
 12th. Arrive at Bai'a, the capital of a district of the same name, governed hy a 
 Sultan of the name of Boshi, who is under the authority of the Sultan Bundam, 
 Bundara himself being dependent on Loel, the Sultan of Adamawa. Bai'a is a place 
 like Gdmderi, situated in a plain between a wadi covered with trees and the foot 
 of the mountains ; but it has not any market. The inhabitants are almost entirely 
 naked. Tbey have asses and sheep, but no large cattle, which is the case also in 
 Bangbay. They have plenty of fowls, which are eaten by the men, but the women 
 do not touch them at all ; a similar distinction between the food of the males 
 and females being observed in all these countries. They likewise eat the flesh 
 of elephants, of which there are very many in the country, and which are 
 caught in pits. There are also numerous parrots. The country produces much 
 dukhen, and the banana is the most common fruit. There is no cotton. The only 
 weapons of the people are spears of wood, which they do not poison. 
 
 Route from Yola to Loggun, 
 
 Which I obtained from another pilgrim of the name of Abu Bakr ben N^m, a 
 native of Kebbi, who on his way to Mekka passed through Adamawa, where he 
 resided a whole year. He has also given me much other information. 
 
 (Rate of travelling very slow with a caravan consisting of oxen, donkeys, and a 
 few horses, about five hours per day.) 
 
 1st day. Beti, a village inhabited by Fellanis, situated on a small stream of the 
 same name, which runs from S. to N., and joins the Benue. The country is plain. 
 
 2nd. Giiri, a large town situated on the western bank of the Filro, a river larger 
 than the Benue itself, and running from S. to N. The country flat; mountains in 
 the distance. 
 
 3rd. Bunam, a place inhabited by Fellani. All the country flat. In the morning 
 you cross the Faro. 
 
 4th. Tsheboa, a place inhabited by Wulemas of the Fellanis, of the tribe Ulerba. 
 Country flat. 
 
 5th. Gdrua, a place inhabited by the Pagans of the Bata, and situated on the 
 Benue, which is even here so large a river as to require to be crossed in boats. 
 Towards the W. there are mountains. 
 
 6th. Diikka, a place inhabited by Fellani, and situated on a small streamlet. The 
 country well shaded by trees, amongst which there are plenty of rimi. Towards 
 the W. mountains. 
 
 7th. Gewe, situated on the other (the eastern) side of the Benue, which has to 
 be crossed in boats at all seasons of the year, the Yemyem being the ferrymen on 
 the river. A large mountain called Banawa, inhabited by the Pagans called Fall, 
 rises close over the Be'nue. 
 
 8th. Bdzuma, a place governed by Sultan Jamhura. The country flat ; wells 
 and pools of water. 
 
 9th. Badesi, inhabited by Fellanis ; situated at the N. foot of a mountain. No 
 streams. 
 
 10th. Bainga, a village in a district called Gidder, and governed by Sultau 
 Omaro Imbi'lla. The country is mountainous, and the road here is not safe. 
 
 1 1th. Binder, a Fellani village. Country flat. No streams ; pools of standing 
 water. 
 
 12th. Lflra, a Fellani village, with a mountain to the W. 
 
 13th. Mi'ndif (so my Fellani informant calls what by others is called Mendefi), 
 a Fellani village, situated at the S. foot of a very high mountain of the same name, 
 which it takes three days to ascend. The Pagans of this district belong to the 
 Summaia. Rocks black and red. 
 
 14th. Amawdin, a Fellani village in a mountainous country, but without run- 
 ning water. 
 
 15th. Jtlguf, a Fellani village, situated at the foot of a small mountain, while 
 the rest of the country is flat. 
 
 ICth. Marrua, a considerable place, inhabited by Fellanis, and a market of im- 
 portance, situated close to a mountain. The Sultan of this imporunt place is 
 Mallem Mohammed Ddmraka.
 
 74 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 17th. Patawi'l, a scattered place, with a considerable market on Wednesday, and 
 governed by Sultan Ingiidii. 
 
 18th. Biilaza, a Fellani village in a flat country. 
 
 19th. Malam, the frontier place of the Fellanis, towards the territory of Mus- 
 gaw. The country flat. 
 
 2()th. In the wilderness, thickly inhabited by elephants, buffaloes, rhinoce- 
 roses, &c. 
 
 21st. Wilderness. 
 
 2'ind. Wiija, a village belonging to the territory of Loggun ; but even here there 
 are Fellanis, who come thus far with their cattle on account of the pasture- 
 grounds. The country flat, only a few hills. 
 
 2.'3rd. Jinna, a village in a fiat, well-shaded country. To the S. of these last- 
 mentioned places there is a most sterile desert, called (by the Fellanis) Fill Obiija, 
 without a single tree. 
 
 24th. In the wilderness. 
 
 25th. The capital of the province Luggun, a large town of the same name, situated 
 on the Sbiiri. As regards the form of the name, I must observe that tlie .native 
 name is Ltiggene, Luggun being the form given to it by the Shiia Arabs. 
 Without continuing this route farther eastward, I will only add that on the fol- 
 lowing day my infonnant, having crossed the Shdri in the morning, slept at a vil- 
 lage situated on the Aisu, which joins the Shiiri at Kiisseri. Consequently, the 
 Aisu is a branch of the Shari, and not the same river in its upper course. 
 
 Route from Yola to Ybo, W.S. W., 
 
 According to an educated native of Yakoba, of the name of Mitllem Kadxiri, who 
 has travelled in Adamawa in almost every direction, and three years ago accom- 
 panied the important razzia made by the powerful Fellan governor of Tshtlmba, 
 whose name is Ambasambo. Kate of travelling about 20 English miles per day. 
 
 1st day. Maibati, a Fellan village, situated on the river Fiiro. Arrive about 
 noon. Direction almost S. 
 
 2nd. Lamarde, a village inhabited by Pagans, and situated on the Fdro, the 
 course of which river the road follows. Mountains at a great distance. Fine 
 country. 
 
 3rd. Tshilmba, a considerable place, inhabited by Fellanis, and governed by the 
 above-mentioned Ambasambo. Tshdmba is finely situated, between the Filro 
 towards the E., and a large mass of mountain on the W., which is visible from a 
 distance of seven days far beyond Yula. This large mountain, which is called 
 Alantika, is thickly inhabited by Pagans governed by seven different princes, and 
 its entire circuit is said to be four days' journey. The whole country is moun- 
 tainous. 
 
 4th day. Gimgiitl, a considerable town of the Fellanis, in a flat country, moun- 
 tains being visible towards the S. You reach the place between 1 and 2 p.m., 
 having in the morning crossed the Fdro, which, during the rains, and for two 
 months afterwards, is as broad as from the western to the eastern gate of Kuka, 
 and is fordable here during seven months of the year. 
 
 5th. Sleep in the wilderness. The country is only a little hilly, and is full of 
 wild animals. Principal fruit-trees, gigifia and goiida. 
 
 Gth. Amb.ina, a Pagan tribe, on a river running from S.W. to N.E., and joining 
 the Faro. Towards S. and W. there are mountains. The whole country uncul- 
 tivated. 
 
 7th. Miimbere, a tribe of Pagans living on the mountains. The country moun- 
 tainous, the road itself leading over the mountains, but no -watercourse. 
 
 8th. Kua-n-Durina (the Haussa name, meaning " a lake inhabited by hippopo- 
 tami "), a considerable lake among the mountains. A long day. Encamp at 
 aser. No village. 
 
 9th. Sambo, a considerable place, inhabited by Fellanis. Country only a little 
 hilly ; water close under the surface. 
 
 loth. Adamajigera, a village governed by the Fellani Adama, and enclosed by 
 mountains on every side. In the valley a fresh stream runs close to the village. 
 
 nth. WarM;indu, a village inhabited !)y Pagans, and situated in a plain, through 
 which the Faio takes its course, being here from S. to N.
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 75 
 
 PSth. Sleep in the forest. Country flat, thickly covered with trees. No inha- 
 bitants. 
 
 13th. Between 9 and 10 a.m. arrive at the considerable river called Jeren, run- 
 ning from W. to E. (?), and called by the Haussa people Kogi-n-Tibati, from the 
 large Fellani town of the name of Tibati, situated on the S. shore of the river, which 
 is to be crossed only in boats. 
 
 14th. Gan'-n-Katshella Bute, as the name implies, the residence of the chieftain 
 of the Bute Pagans. The whole road through forests. No river. 
 
 15th. Gari-n-Katshcdla Tekdr, the residence of the chief of the Tekdr. The 
 whole country so thickly covered with forest, that you can scarcely get sight of 
 the sun. 
 
 16th. Gan'-n-Katshillla Yemyem. the ill-famed Pagan tribe. All forest. 
 
 17th. Gari-n-M6ntsheran Riite, another chief of the Biite. Country plain. 
 
 18th. A Pagan settlement at the foot and on the top of a mountain called 
 Tngua. 
 
 19th. Gan'-n-serki-n- Yemyem, the residence of the Sultan of these cannibals, 
 situated in a valley thickly covered with trees. 
 
 20th. Gari-n-serki-n-Fiindu, another tribe of Pagans, who have each their parti- 
 cular language. They are all armed with bows and arrows. 
 
 21st. Gari'-n-serki'-n-Tekiir, residence of the chief of the Tekar, who, according 
 to my informant, give themselves four cuts close under the eye, a little towards 
 the ear. 
 
 22nd. Gari-n-Katshella-n-Biim, situated on another large river, not passable, 
 except in boats, and called (by the Haussa people) Rua-n-Kado. It runs from E. 
 to W. 
 
 23rd. Sleep on the northern shore of the same river, here called Baki-n-kogf- 
 Jetem, after the Pagan inhabitants of this country called Jetem. It winds along 
 among mountains. 
 
 24th. A village of the Mo, a large tribe of Pagans, living on the top of the moun- 
 tains situated on the same river. All this tribe are armed with guns. A long 
 day's journey till aser. 
 
 25th. Another tribe, called Abo, on a rivulet winding through the mountains. 
 All armed with guns. On your road you see the town of Umbli, with a large 
 mountain towards the S. 
 
 26th. Dingding, another Pagan tribe, who eat clay, which they mix with butter. 
 
 27th. Yiirua, a Pagan tribe, armed with guns, and living on the mountains. 
 
 28th. P6, another tribe, living principally on sugar-cane, which they boil and 
 eat like honey. Mountainous. 
 
 29th. Ybo, dwelling in nine villages on the sea-shore, called by my informant 
 Baki-n-rua. The Ybo have neither cattle, horses, nor asses, but plenty of large 
 sheep, goats, swine, and fowls. The expedition which my informant accompanied 
 spent two months in Ybo, plundering the whole country and carrying away a great 
 many slaves. Since that time the Fellanis can in some respects truly say that their 
 empire extends to the sea, of which Bello vainly boasted ; for now every year the 
 Ybos and their neighbours bring slaves, salt, and cowries, as a kind of tribute to 
 the governor of Tshiimba. The expedition afterwards took another direction ; and 
 from Gari-n-Katshella Bum went to IMbo (Bafo?), in six long days' march, this 
 country being three days to the N. of Ybo. But my informant cannot give any 
 distinct account of this part of his journey ; the only interesting fact which he is 
 able to relate being that E. of Bubo there is a large town called Tsho, in a moun- 
 tainous district. This memorable expedition was altogether absent two years. 
 
 Route from Tshdmba to Baia. 
 
 1st. Lamardd (not the place of that name already mentioned), a journey of only 
 four hours. The river Fiiro is crossed Itefore leaving the town of Tshdmba. 
 
 2nd. Gabdumana, inhabited by Pagans. Country mountainous. 
 
 3rd. Sleep in the wood. 
 
 4th. Bere, a settlement of Pagans on the mountains. The country irrigated by 
 small streams. 
 
 5th. Umbi'im, a village of Pagans on the mountains. 
 
 6th. Umbum bdlbcl, the principal settlement of the TJnibum, situated at the W. 
 foot of a mountain, the country being also bounded by mountains towards the W.
 
 76 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 7th. Katir, anotlier Pagan tribe in the mountains. Cross the Faro, -which runs 
 from E. to W., In-ing alwaj s near the road. It is passable only in boats. 
 
 8th. Yangaro, a settlement of a section of the Yeniyem of this name, in a moun- 
 tainous country through which a stream runs towards the Faio. 
 
 9th. Yere, a settlement of Pagans in an extensive plain, without trees, but irri- 
 gated by water-courses. 
 
 10th. Baia, a place inhabited entirely by Pagans, and governed by a great many 
 petty chiefs. The country is flat and all open towards the W., while E. of Baia 
 there is a mountain. 
 
 Route from Katdgum to Boberu, almost due S. 
 
 1st day. Early in the morning, between 9 and 10 o'clock, you reach Sakkua, a 
 large place surrounded by an earth-wall, on the E. bank of the Kogi Katagum, the 
 water of which is used by the inhabitants. In the summer there is no stream, 
 but merely pools of water. The houses of Sakkua are built partly of earth and 
 partly of hashish. There is a market held here on Saturday. On the road you 
 pass many small villages. 
 
 2nd. About 11 o'clock arrive at Kefli, a large village surrounded by a wooden 
 fence, and belonging to the province of Katagum. Many small villages on the 
 road. 
 
 3rd. An hour after midday reach Hardawa, a large place surrounded by an 
 earth-wall, still under Katagum. On the road you pass many villages. The soil 
 consists of sand, and there are but few trees. 
 
 4th. Mesaw, a large place surrounded by an earth-wall, the houses being, as 
 usual, built of mud, with pointed roofs of hashish, or the reed of ghussub. The 
 palace of Yerima alone is built entirely of earth. The inhabitants are all of them 
 Fellanis. A considerable market is held here on Friday. All the soil sand. 
 
 5th. About noon Daraso, a large walled place belonging to the province of 
 Bawshi. In the morning you cross a stream in the midst of the forest. From 
 Daraso the road turns a little to the E. of S. From this place there is a road to 
 Bawshi, which is given below. 
 
 6th. About two or half-past two o'clock p.m. reach Tawia, a large place with 
 an earth-wall now in decay, where there are many Pagans. All thick forest. 
 
 7th. Early in the morning, about 9 o'clock, arrive at Boberu, a large walled 
 place, which is said to have received its name from the late Sultan, who died nine 
 years ago. The present Sultan is Kurauga, a Fellani. His house is the only 
 good building in the place, the other houses as usual. 
 
 From Daraso to Bawshi. 
 
 1st day. About Aser reach Soro, a small open place belonging to Bawshi, 
 situated at the western foot of a rock. The road lies through a mountainous country, 
 the first half being thickly wooded. 
 
 2nd. About 1 o'clock p.m. arrive at Kirfi, a large open place under the rock, 
 inhabited entirely by Pagans. The whole road is intersected by high mountains, 
 with living [perennial ?] springs. All Pagans. 
 
 3rd. About 11 o'clock a.m., Tyrrem, a large open place, surrounded by moun- 
 tains towards the E. and S. On the road are small villages situated on the tops of 
 the mountains, and inhabited by Pagans. 
 
 4th. Early in the morning, about 9 o'clock, arrive at Yakoba. All the road 
 mountainous, with small villages on the tops of the mountains. 
 
 From Boberu to Ydkoha, 
 
 1st day. About 11 o'clock a.m. reach Beri-heri, a large open place situated in a 
 broad sandy plain, the mountains being in thedistance. The houses are not of earth, 
 but are merely huts made of hashish. '1 he place is inhabited by Fellanis and 
 Berawm's. It belongs to the province of Mesaw. The inhabitants drink the waters 
 of a river passing Ben-ben', and running towards Kare-kare'. 
 
 2nd. About Aser reach Semmeni, a large open place situated on a mountain. 
 The inhabitants are all Pagans. The road mountainous, with villages on the tops 
 of the mountains. 
 
 3rd. About half past 1 o'clock p..m. reach Tyrrem. 
 
 4th. Yakoba.
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 77 
 
 Route from Katdgum to Shera, S.S. W. 
 
 1st day. About Aser reach Gubu, a large opeu place belonging to the province 
 of Katagum. The country opeu, partly cultivated and inhabited, and partly 
 covered with forest. 
 
 2nd. About 11 o'clock a.m. reach Uzuni, a small open village belonging to the 
 province of Katagum. The whole country is well cultivated, with many 
 villages. 
 
 3rd. About noon arrive at Shera, a considerable place, fortified by nature from 
 its position among the rocks around it, which leave only a narrow approach from 
 N.W. and S. ; otherwise there is no wall. Most of the houses are as usual in the 
 larger places, some only being of hashish. The house of the governor is built of 
 earth. The market is of no importance. 
 
 From Shtra to Bawshi. - W.^ a little S. 
 
 1st day. About half-past 1 o'clock p.m. arrive at Fagam, a place larger than 
 Shera, surrounded by a mud wall, being the frontier of the province of Kand 
 towards the S. The country flat. 
 
 2nd. About 11 o'clock a.m., Ganjua, a large open place belonging to Bawshi. 
 All the houses are built of hashish, that of the governor alone being of earth. The 
 country mountainous, with many springs and pools of water. Large numbers of 
 palm trees. 
 
 2nd. About Aser arrive at Yakoba. Road through a mountainous country. 
 
 From. Kdtab to Yakoba. 
 
 1st day. About Aser reach Alhajji, a considerable village belonging to the 
 province of Zaria, and situated at the W. foot of a mountain. All the road through 
 forest. 
 
 2nd. About noon arrive at Sabo-n-birni, a small village built of hashish. The 
 road is partly covered with forest and partly cultivated ; but there are no villages, 
 the people during the rainy season coming from a great distance to cultivate the 
 country. 
 
 3rd. About noon reach Rime, a considerable place, surrounded by an earth-wall, 
 situated where the roads from Kano and Kdtab meet. A market is held here every 
 Tuesday. 
 
 4th. About 1 o'clock p.m reach Ambutu, a village situated at the foot of a 
 mountain, on the top of which there is another place of the same name. The 
 inhabitants, who are very ferocious, pass a bone through their mouth. They do 
 not pay tribute to the Fellanis, and constantly interrupt the communication, as is 
 just now the case. There is a rivulet near the first village which runs into the 
 Gurara, one of the tributary streams of the Kwara. The whole road through 
 forest. 
 
 5th. About 1 o'clock p.m. reach "VVarji, a village situated at the foot of a large 
 mountain winding round far to the W., on the top of which there are other villages 
 of the same name, whose inhabitants wage war against the Fellanis, having 
 [lately ?] killed the eldest son of the governor of Kano, to whom the inhabitants in 
 the valley pay tribute. There is a particular kind of cattle here calk-d Mutiiru, 
 smaller than the ox, with shorter legs, and without the hump of fat on its back. 
 
 6th. About Aser reach Malanlawel, a considerable place with an earth-wall, 
 situated in the plain at the S.E. foot of the large mountain or mountain-range 
 already mentioned. The whole country is laid out in cultivated fields. 
 
 7th. After Aser arrive at Sarauda. The road partly wood and partly cul- 
 tivated. 
 
 8th. At noon Yakoba. 
 
 Route from Kand to Kuka, by the way of Khadeja, or the Middle road, there 
 beitnj three roads, viz., by Katagum or the Southerii, by Khadrja, and by 
 Guniinel. 
 
 1st day. About 1 p.m. reach Gddia, a walled place, where the governor of Kand 
 has a house.
 
 78 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 2nd. Half-past 1 o'clock p.m. reach a place called Gaia, after having passed at 
 about 1 A.M. a large Wadi, wliich has water only in the rainy season. 
 
 3rd. About Aser arrive at Dutshi, after having in the morning crossed a stream 
 called Dedurru, and about an hour before midday an almost deserted place called 
 Katii-katii. 
 
 4th. About Aser reach Zogo, a large open place, after having in the morning 
 crossed the Kadwana, which runs towards Katiigum. Many small villages on the 
 road. 
 
 .'ith. Before Aser reach Khadcja, a large place, the residence of the governor, 
 surrounded by a wall of great extent, but not inclosing so large an open area as 
 Katshna or Kanu. The entire space however within the walls is inhabited. The 
 houses consist of collections of circular huts and sheds of hashish surrounded by 
 a mud wall. This is the last place on the road from Kanu where marinii or dyeing 
 with indigo is met with ; but there is no other business carried on here, as the in- 
 habitants employ tliemselves in roving expeditious or razzias, for which the 
 position of the place is favourable. To the S. of the town is a Wadi running down 
 towards Bede, with pools of standing water during the dry season, the banks on 
 either side being laid out in corn fields. 
 
 6th. About U o'clock reach Gan'mgabbes, a walled town smaller than Khadeja, 
 on the other side of which commences the territory of the Sheikh. The whole 
 country through which you pass is divided into numerous small villages. 
 
 7th. At Aser arrive at Allamego, a deserted place. The whole country covered 
 with forest. 
 
 8th. About 1 o'clock p.m. reach Kalemn', a large place situated in a sandy plain 
 and surrounded by a wall built of sand, the houses being of the usual materials. 
 As far as Bendi, a place surrounded by a wooden fence and belonging to the Gala- 
 dima(?) of Bornu, the whole country is covered with wood. At this place the pro- 
 vince of Manga commences. 
 
 9th. Reach Donari about Aser, a large place surrounded by an earth wall ; after 
 having passed a small Wadi called Wani about 1 o'clock p.m. There is no village 
 on the road, and all is covered with wood. 
 
 10th. Arrive about half-past 1 p.m. at Anganawen, a place of middling size, 
 with an earth wall. All the country covered with wood. 
 
 11th. lieach an open place or valley, about half-past 11 a.m. The houses 
 consist of earth and hashish. The entire road through forest. 
 
 12th. About noon arrive at Kusselua, an opeu place. The whole country 
 covered with wood. 
 
 l.'Bth. About 4 o'clock p.ini. an open place called Kashimma, situated on the side 
 of a Wadi, which comes down from Katagum, and passing by Mikibii joins the 
 Yaw. In this Wadi there are pools of standing water during the dry season, and 
 its banks are laid out in corn fields. The whole country wilderness. 
 
 14tli About 1 P.M. Mi'kiba, an open place, situated on the same Wadi. No 
 cultivation on the road. 
 
 15th. About 1 o'clock p.m. reach a well called Kaskawa, where you encamp. 
 No village, but shepherds. 
 
 16th. About the same time arrive at an open place called Kinshandi. This day 
 you pass some small villages on the road. 
 
 17th. Keach a considerable open place called Bua, a domain of the Sheikh of 
 Boruii, whose slaves cultivate the fields. On the road are numerous villages, and 
 the whole country in cultivation. 
 
 18th. Ik'tween 11 and 12 o'clock arrive at a small village called Kangarrud. 
 Numerous villages. 
 
 19th. About Aser reach Kahlua, after having passed many villages ou your road. 
 You here see the trees of Kuka. 
 
 20th. In about two hours arrive at Kuka. 
 
 Northern Route from Kan6 to Khadeja. 
 
 1st day. A little after midday, Gezawa, a walled place with huts of hashfsh. All 
 the country cultivated. 
 
 2nd. About Aser, Ziikcn', a large walled place, the houses of which are built of 
 "arth and hashish. Many villages on the road.
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 79 
 
 3rd. A little before sunset reach Ki'lli, a considerable walled place: the bouses 
 as well as the wall being built of earth. Only a few villages on your road. 
 
 4th. About Aser arrive at Merku, a large walled town built entirely of earth. 
 You pass many villages, all belonging to the province of Khadeja. 
 
 5th. About an hour before noon reach Askandu, a large open village, with huts 
 of hashish. 
 
 6th. Early in the morning, about 9 o'clock, reach Khadeja, after having passed 
 many villages. 
 
 Route from Kano to Kiika, by the way of Giimmel. 
 
 1st day. A little after midday Gezawa. 
 
 2nd. About 10 o'clock a.m., Gabesawa, an open place with a considerable market, 
 ■which is held every other day, as is also the case with Gezawa, so that there is 
 every day a market at one of these two places. 
 
 3rd. In about three hours reach Kuka-merua. 
 
 4th. About Aser arrive at Gerki, a large walled place ; the houses consisting of 
 earth and hashish. In the morning you pass a small open place called Amagua, 
 and about an hour before midday Duko, a village situated in the midst of the 
 wood. 
 
 5th. About 2 o'clock p.m. reach Gi'mimel, the first place belonging to the Sheikh, 
 surrounded by a wall of earth, and a wooden fence, as likewise by two ditches, oue 
 inside and the other outside. Its Sunday (liihedi) market is important, though 
 there are no manufactures in the town, which is the residence of tlie former governor 
 Daw Tanuma. About 9 o'clock in the morning you pass an open village called 
 Delladi, and further on a walled place called Birmenawa. 
 
 Gummel, March 13, 1851. — Here in this place, where I arrived yesterday, ac- 
 companied by a very amiable and well educated Sherif from Fas, I continue this 
 itinerary, which, as far as I have seen, is very correct, with the exception that 
 there is a market here on Friday, Saturday, and Sunday ; the most important being 
 that on Saturday. 
 
 6th. About half-past 1 p.m. reach an open village called Mai Magaria. The 
 whole country is cultivated, and there are a few small villages on the road. The 
 fields contain only a few large trees. 
 
 7th. Between 2 and 3 p.m. arrive at Taganama, a large place surrounded by a 
 wooden fence. On the road you pass a deserted place called Fernaski, which has 
 been plundered by the people of Khadt'ja. 
 
 8th. About 1 p.m. reach a small walled place called Ingleri, belonging to the 
 governor of Mashna. The country covered with large trees. 
 
 9th. Miishna, a town of the same size as Tasawa, surrounded by a wooden fence, 
 situated at the S. base of a considerable hill, while also towards tlie S. there is 
 another hill of less size. The houses consist of earth and hashish. The market 
 is held on Sunday. The present governor is liarma Kakami. 
 
 10th. About 1 P.M. reach a small village called Berturi, after having in the 
 morning passed Gogi, an open place situated at the foot of a mountain, and governed 
 by the brother of the governor of Miishna. 
 
 11th. About 11 A.M. arrive at Sullen, a large open place belonging to the 
 governor of Minyo, with a market on Friday. In the morning you pass Se'ggrari, 
 a small village. 
 
 12th. lu the morning reach a considerable place called Bon(', situated at the S. 
 base of a large bill, with the house of a governor. The country woody. 
 
 13th. About Aser arrive at Tiingule, a village with plenty of date trees, situated 
 at the S.W. foot of a mountain or hill. The road lies through a country covered 
 with wood, but about an hour before midday you pass a village called Gasem, 
 situated on a hill. 
 
 14th. About 9 A.M. reach Minyo, a large open place situated in the midst of the 
 sand, and consisting entirely of hashish, witli the exception of the bouse of the 
 governor, Ibrahim Ko'so, who has to deliver the tribute to jVbder liahnian, the 
 brother of the Sheikh of Boruti. A c(msiderable market is held here on Friday. 
 
 15th. About 11 A.M. reach Kadahilfua, a large open place belonging to Manga, 
 situated in a Wadi contaijiing numerous trees, the country, which is all sand,
 
 80 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 being in general open. Mncli trona (natron) is found here, and constitutes a 
 very important branch of trade -witli Njffi, by t!ie way of Kano. 
 
 16th. About the same time reach Beri Bershi, a now deserted village, situated 
 on a Wadi where there is good salt. The entire country is one open sandy plain, 
 with isolated hamlets. 
 
 17th. About 1 P.M. arrive at Katafuliram, a small deserted village. All the 
 country consists of sand without trees. 
 
 ISth. About 1 P.M. reach Dembaram, a large place belonging to the district of 
 Astcka, situated in the sand, and built entirely of the reed of the ghussub. 
 
 19th. About Aser reach Berberua, a large walled place. The whole country is 
 nothing but sand. No wells. 
 
 2Uth. Early in the morning, between 9 and 10 o'clock, reach Debaggo, a small 
 village situated on a branch of the river Yaw, which is dry in summer. In addi- 
 tion to ghussub and onions a little corn is cultivated here. There is no more sand, 
 and the soil is fertile, the country being covered with trees. 
 
 21st, Encamp at what hour you please, in a district called Kuiiam, consisting of 
 many small villages. 
 
 22ud. Encamp in the same district with the tribe named Mebber. 
 
 23rd. About 1 p.m. reach Buii, the country densely peopled. 
 
 24th. About 11 a.m. encamp in the district called Kagarrua. 
 
 25th. At Aser, Kalilua. 
 
 2Gth. Early in the morning arrive at Kuka. 
 
 If you desire to take a sboiter road, and not go by Minyo, you proceed direct 
 from Mashna, and between 11 and 12 o'clock reach Bendi on the Khadeja road — 
 this road by Giimmel, Mashna, Bendi, &c., being at present the general caravan 
 road between Kanu and Bornu, as it is by far the safest. 
 
 Secofid Letter from Dr. Barth to Mr. Petermann. 
 Route from Kano to Toto, via Zaria, 
 
 1st day. The direction S.W. as far as Zaria, then S. 
 
 2nd. Between 10 and 11 a.m. reach a place called Madobi, with a market. 
 
 3rd. Between 9 and 10 a.m. reach the town of Bebeji. 
 
 4th. About 1 P.M. arrive at liimi-n-Kawra, a number of villages, with a rivulet, 
 running eastward. 
 
 .5th. About 9 A.M. reach Baki-n-Kilminda, a group of scattered villages. 
 
 6tli. About 11 A.M. reach a walled town, called Dansushia, rich in date trees. 
 Here is the frontier between the province of Kano and that of Zaria, marked by a 
 large wadi, dry in summer. 
 
 7th. A little after noon reach a small river running eastward, but afterwards 
 turning to the S., and uniting its waters witli those of the Kadiina, which receives 
 all the water of this part of the country. The river is called Kubiitutu, and there 
 is a village on its bank, called .■\nsh6. 
 
 8th. About 11 A.M., after a journey through a woody country, reach Riima, a 
 large place, but thinly inhabited, and with the walls in a state of decay. 
 
 9th. About the same time you reach a walled place, called Likoro, where there 
 is a market evei'y other day. All the country is thickly wooded, and not culti- 
 vated. 
 
 Kitli. Between 9 and 10 in the morning, after having crossed a river, which 
 sometimes in the rainy season it is difficult to pass, you arrive at Zaria.* 
 
 11th. Between 11 and 12 a.m. arrive at a village called Ungua Arende. Small 
 water-pools on the road. 
 
 12th. About 11 A.M. reach Kasellu, a walled place, with the wall in a state of 
 decay, and with a market held on every other day. 
 
 13th. About the same time at Gi'mba, a large walled place, but thinly inhabited. 
 14th. lleach Matari, a large place. Between Gimba and Miitari, nearer to the 
 latter place, there is a wadi, which during the rainy season can only be crossed 
 in boats. 
 
 * Though Clapperton proceeded on this road as far as Zaria, there are many new 
 particulars in tliis itinerary.
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 81 
 
 15th. Kabi, a considerable walled market-place. 
 
 IGth. Reach a small village, called Kasabo, situated on a mountain range 
 running eastward. The whole country is mountainous, and a little before you 
 reach Kasabo there is a high mountain with another village on its top. 
 
 17th. Encamp .in the forest called Dawa serki-n-Fawa, where there is a wadi, 
 dry during the hot season. 
 
 18th. A small village of the district Kadara. plundered by the Fellanis. 
 
 19th. During the dry season you reach a place called Tere, while in the rainy 
 season you encamp on the shore of the Gurara, one of the branches of the Kaduna, 
 which cannot be crossed but in boats. The country mountainous. 
 
 20th. Eeach a small village called Kamane. Country mountainous. 
 
 21st. A small place, called Kateri, situated on a wooded wadi, with water at all 
 seasons of the year. 
 
 22nd. A scattered village, called Golaminda, inhabited entirely by Fellanis. 
 The country level, with mountains at a distance. 
 
 23rd. Reach Kogaro, a considerable market-place. Country mountainous, irri- 
 gated by many streamlets. 
 
 24th. Fajari, a small place with a wall in decay. Country plain, with plenty of 
 water. 
 
 25th. liagaji, a considerable walled market-place. 
 
 26th. Keffi Abdese'nga, a large place, with a market every day. There is a high 
 mountain to the \V. The country in general is flat. Plenty of streamlets. 
 
 27th. Gongdndara, a large place, with a wall in decay. The mountains at some 
 distance. Much water. 
 
 28th. Guagua, a place of middle size. A mountain to the E. 
 
 29th. Tamma, a large walled place in a plain, with much water. 
 
 30th. Ddgeri, a place of middle size, wall in decay, the frontier of the extensive 
 province of Zaria and of the independent kingdom of Tanda. 
 
 31st. Ogobe, a large, walled market-place, belonging to Toto. No mountains, 
 but much water. 
 
 32nd. Gano, a considerable open place. Country flat, plenty of trees, parti- 
 cularly of those called maja (the gum-tree). 
 
 33rd. Arrive at Toto. This place, according to my informant, is of about the 
 same size as Kand ; but is more thickly inhabited, and is divided into two distinct 
 quarters, the Western and the Eastern, the former being inhabited by the natives 
 or the Katawa, who have a distinct language, and are pagans, while the eastern 
 quarter is the dwelling-place of the Moslinis,fviz., people from Katshna, Kand, and 
 Bornii, who have a sultan for themselves, El Iman. According to my informant, 
 El Iman is not thej^Sultan or Governor of the whole town, the town and province 
 of Toto being ung^j the direct government of the Sultan of Tanda, whose name 
 is Shemmage. To the W. of the town there is a rivulet called Rafi-n-Konama, at 
 the foot of a mountain. 
 
 Three days to the^. of Toto there is a country called Tagara, whose inhabitants, 
 called Katun-karifi * by the Haussa people, bring European merchandise and cowries 
 to the market of Toto. My informant, like every one else in the interior, has no 
 idea of the distance to the ocean, nor does he know anything about the Tshadda, 
 which river is^rtainly identical with the Benue, and must be near to Toto. 
 
 From Toto to Yakdba there are said to be 7 days. 
 
 ^ Route from Ginga {Gonja?) to Sdhatu, 
 
 According to two different informants, one of whom is the same person who gave 
 me the route to Toto ; the other'is a man who has travelled more than twenty years 
 on the Bilad el^S^ldn^or Desert, and is a brother of a servant of Abd Allah Clap- 
 perton. 
 
 Direction N.E. Road stony. The rate of travelling is slow, and on asses, 
 encamping geijerally between 11 and 12 o'clock. About hours per day. 
 
 1st day. '^lasaka,"'a small village; merchandise, kola nuts. 
 
 2nd. Viila£;e called Turu. 
 
 3rd. A place rather larger, called Kadena, belonging to the district of Yensala. 
 * . _— — . — 
 
 * Katu-n-kdrafi^ iron district. — Ed.
 
 &2 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 4tli. After haviug crossed a river running towards the E., arrive at Kania. 
 
 5th. Yendi, a well-known place of importance (Dahomey?). 
 
 6th. Sakaigo, a small village 
 
 7th. Maizahbi, a small village. 
 
 8th. The large town of Sansanimango. 
 
 Dtli. A small village, called Gdngari-n-gulbi', situated on a water of great extent 
 (U. Galbi?). 
 
 Idth. A deserted village, called by the caravan travellers Gari-n-mutiim daca. 
 
 1 Ith. A small village, called Maitukane. 
 
 12tli. Bi'lgii, a considerable place with plenty of gigiiiia, a kind of palm-tree 
 peculiar to Bilad el Sudan. 
 
 13th. Villag© called Fellale, built partly upon the rock. 
 
 1 9th. Fiimnia, a large place, and the residence of an independent sultan, who 
 wages continual war with Borgu. The language is not Fellani, but a retana or 
 gibberish. From this place the territory of the Fellanis begins. 
 
 2Uth. Kure, a small place. 
 
 21st. A place called by caravan travellers (jari-n-maifari-n-doki. 
 
 22nd. A place called Majuri, situated at the northern basis of a mountain. 
 Hereabouts is a river called Kafa-n-gora, which is sometimes crossed by swimming 
 on skins. 
 
 23rd. A place called Sudumelli saho. 
 
 24th. Encamp near to Sudume'lli sofo (old), a large but deserted place. 
 
 25th. A considerable town, called Diigu, situated near to a river called Makura. 
 
 2fJth. A village whose name my informants do not recollect. 
 
 27th. A place of middle size, called Kurkujangu. 
 
 29th. I?aki-n-Kiimba, a large place situated on the W. shore of the Kawara. 
 Here are a great many boats. 
 
 30th. Cross the river towards the E., and encamp near Baki-n-r6a, a small place 
 on the opposite shore 
 
 31st. Foga, a place of middle size, but thickly inhabited on account of the excel- 
 lent red salt which is found here, and constitutes an important article of trade. 
 
 32nd. A small village called Bengo. 
 
 33rd. Ye'Uu, a large place with a wall of earth ; the first walled town on this 
 road. 
 
 34th. A village called" K6ka. 
 
 35th. Another walled town, called Gulma, 
 
 3Cth. Encamp in the district called Giiwasu, from which the walls of Birni-n- 
 Kebbi are visible in the distance to the right. 
 
 37th. Encamp in the same rich and thickly inhabited district, full of cattle and 
 rice. 
 
 38th. Still the same rich district. 
 
 39th. You arrive at Sakatu. 
 
 Itinerary from Karnak Baghrimmi to Bang-bay. 
 
 1st day. Massena, a large place of Baghrimmi. 
 
 2nd. Arrive at the river Ba-ir, which runs eastwards, and is called so after a 
 town of the name of Ir, situated on the other side of the river. (Ba means water, 
 river.) 
 
 3rd. Batshikam, a small town belonging to Baghrimmi. 
 
 4th. Early in the morning reach Garam, which you leave in the afternoon about 
 2 P.M., and sleep in the forest. 
 
 .')th. Liiffana, situated on a watercourse running E. 
 
 f;th. Embarked in a boat, followed the river, and slept on its bank. Does not 
 remember the name of the rivei*. 
 
 7th. Reached Biiso in the morning, a considerable place, with a powerful sultan. 
 
 8th. Mini, an island in the Shiiry, with a great many boats. The river is full 
 of crocodiles, and the inhabitants do not venture to go near, but fetch water from 
 a well dug expressly for this purpose at some distance. 
 
 9th. Haldnga, a place under the same government as Buso. 
 
 10th. A large town, called Tabc, inhabited almost entirely by Mohametaus. 
 
 1 1th. Gadiing, a village whose inhabitants are pagans. 
 
 12th. Kiar, a small village.
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 83 
 
 13th. A considerable place, belonging to the powerful sultan AH Fnijar. All 
 these places are entirely built of hashish, or rather ghussub straw. The country is 
 rich in horses, and is one level. 
 
 14th. The residence of Sultan Bang-Dam. The country is flat, and is covered 
 with small villages, shaded by fine trees. The soil sandy. All the inhabitants are 
 naked, excepting the sultan, who wears a robe. Their principal food is horseflesh. 
 
 15th. A large place in the province, called Isemrai, the residence of the sultan, 
 Baug Wonja. The soil is here clayey. 
 
 16th. Another town of Isemrai, the residence of the sultan Bfirso. Soil continues 
 clayey. The wells are from two to three fathoms deep. Ghafuli is the principal 
 produce and food. Some large trees. 
 
 1 7th. The sultan Fatshang Gongawe, whose country is thickly inhabited. There 
 are a great many valleys, dry except in the rainy season, when the country is im- 
 passable. 
 
 18th. After a long day's journey arrive at Gabberi, a large place. All these 
 petty kingdoms make war on each other, and the inhabitants kidnap each other. 
 Nearly all these people, from the beginning of Isemrai, eat their dogs, though 
 they have plenty of cattle as well as of horses. Their idol is a tree of the kind of 
 jume's, as the Arabs call it, round which they kill dogs and sheep, while they make 
 a dreadful music by beating on dried skins. They are not armed with bow or 
 spear, but only with the sling, which they call jigaji in their own language. 
 
 19th. Arrive at Korin iiina, a large place, residence of the sultan Koina. It is 
 strongly fortified for this country, being first surrounded by an earth wall, then at 
 a greater distance by a fence of wood, outside of which there is a ditch skirted 
 by trees. The town is surrounded by a great many villages. The inhabitants, 
 pagans of course, wear nothing but a girdle of leather. The principal produce of 
 the country consists in beans. 
 
 20th. Enter another territory, called Sara, belonging to the Sultan Gdsdega, who 
 resides in a large open place. Here, besides beans, plenty of ghussub and gha- 
 fiili is cultivated ; and a tree grows here, which is of great use to the inhabitants, 
 who not only eat its fruit, which resembles dates, but use its pith instead of butter 
 and oil : it is called taber, and has a large top, but small leaves. 
 
 21st. Reach Sartingakumra, another place belonging to Gdsdega, who is quite 
 independent. The inhabitants drink the water of a standing pool. 
 
 22nd. After a good day's journey arrive at Sard bedai, residence of the Sultan 
 Sariii, who has plenty of cavalry at his command. 
 
 23rd. Yaldting, inhabited by people of the great tribe of the B(ia. 
 
 24th. Arrive at a place called Gamkul. The country has now changed, and has 
 acquired another aspect ; for instead of clay, the soil consists of sand ; and instead 
 of a monotonous plain, where water is only obtained from wells, the country is 
 mountainous, the mountains and hills being covered with trees, and rivulets rushing 
 down from them. It is thickly inhabited by elephants, giraffes, lions, and swine ; 
 this latter animal constituting the principal food of the inhabitants. 
 
 2.5th. After having crossed the mountain range, arrive at a place called Dan 
 Madobd,' situated at the southern base of the mountains, and the residence of the 
 Sultan Gare. Cotton, durra, and ghafuli are cultivated. 
 
 26th. Dan Bebe, the residence of Sultan Gargoda. In this part of the country 
 there are no watercourses but in the rainy season ; produces cotton and ddrra. 
 
 27th. Kome, in a mountainous country. While the fields are on the slopes and 
 tops of the hills and mountains, the inhabitants live in the valleys, not retiring to 
 the mountains but in case of war. 
 
 28th. Kdmarc', with a few Mahometans. No dress but a girt round the loins. 
 A rock is their idol. Country mountainous. 
 
 29th. Andf, after a whole day's journey. The people, called Sujiga, surpass 
 their neighbours in civilization ; for they dress not only themselves, but even their 
 horses. The country all mountainous. 
 
 3()th. Burda, situated on a lake of great extent, considerable depth, and full of 
 fish ; enclosed by mountains all round. It is called Garmtiuga. 
 
 31st. Tiimki, in a mountainous country, producing durra, besides which the 
 inhabitants live principally on lizards, which they cook. They are all Pagans, of 
 a dark black colour, armed with spear and arrow. While the men wear clothes, at 
 least a shirt, the women go naked. 
 
 g2
 
 84 
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 32nd. Guberd, whose inhabitants go naked. The country mountainous, coverei 
 with many trees. 
 
 33rd. My referents reached Bang-bay, situated on the south bank of a large river 
 running eastward, and called here Babay, that is to say, the river of Bay. There 
 are a great many boats on the river, and it is full of fish. Bang-bay is the residence 
 of the Sultan Sara Guli. The people live like animals, and are only armed with 
 slings. My referent, or rather one of the two brothers, viz., Agi't Burku, though 
 he made a stay of three years at Bang-bay, could not give me any information as 
 to the countries farther to the S. But lo satisfy my curiosity lie brought to me 
 a son of his Majesty the King of Bang-bay, by name Tikorkum Kasemtii, who 
 condescended for a few cowries to sing and dance before me after the fashion 
 of his country : I am sorry to say, however, that the prince's intellect was not 
 clear enough to give me much information. Besides a few words of his own 
 language, I could only make out the names of four countries or districts to the S. 
 of Kang-bay, with the names of their respective petty sultans. These are Tshik- 
 ikana, with the Sultan Nie Dau tshin Bay kobbo ; Urdauje, with Bay Kobele; 
 Negere, with Ingigge du Kuddu ; and Jiggiktibera, with Sultan Bang Umkaiji : this 
 last is a large place. All these districts and towns (for the name represents both) 
 are on or not far from a very large lake, called Inji koro. On anxiously inquiring 
 after this lake I was told that there were seven such waters almost parallel to each 
 other farther to the S., the names of three of which are Inji Kemada, Inji man- 
 made, and Inji mantu. 
 
 
 A few Words of the 
 
 Bang-bay Langt 
 
 tage. 
 
 English. 
 
 Bang-l)ay. 
 
 English. 
 
 Bang-bay 
 
 sun 
 
 kar 
 
 horse 
 
 ngella 
 
 moon 
 
 nai 
 
 elephant 
 
 dakir 
 
 stars 
 
 koeyd 
 
 sheep 
 
 biuan je'lleba 
 
 heaven 
 
 tar 
 
 pig 
 
 beri 
 
 rain 
 
 injiketar 
 
 dog 
 
 bissi 
 
 God (idol) 
 
 Omaji 
 
 lion 
 
 tobai 
 
 rainy season 
 
 bar 
 
 milk 
 
 imba 
 
 dry 
 
 jenne 
 
 durra 
 
 wa 
 
 wind 
 
 m61a milla baig 
 
 spear 
 
 ninga 
 
 fire 
 
 puriiiallaba 
 
 sling 
 
 mia 
 
 water 
 
 inji, man 
 
 dress 
 
 kobfi 
 
 man 
 
 dmga 
 
 guest, friend 
 
 baje 
 
 people 
 
 bemea 
 
 enemy 
 
 jejangeje 
 
 father 
 
 babunja 
 
 good 
 
 miijibai 
 
 mother 
 
 kome 
 
 bad 
 
 koral 
 
 ■woman 
 
 denetema ? 
 
 warm 
 
 wulbadi 
 
 head 
 
 daigelle 
 
 cold 
 
 otoko 
 
 eye 
 
 kamtd 
 
 to-day 
 
 binn^tema 
 
 ear 
 
 duda 
 
 to-morrow 
 
 barahnga 
 
 mouth 
 
 taribeglem 
 
 come, imp. 
 
 ideromto 
 
 heart 
 
 mumttim 
 
 go, imp. 
 
 aw 
 
 Route from Timbuktu lo Sakatu, by Mohammed el Aiiaia, who performed 
 the journey in quick marches. 
 
 In eight days reached Humberi, a large town situated on a mountain, with a 
 considerable market every day. According to Mohammed el Anaia, Humberi 
 belongs to the Fellani residing in Timbuktu, and the language is likewise 
 Fellani ; but, according to another traveller, the language is identical with that 
 of Timbuktu. 
 
 15. In 7 days, Harbilnda, at the foot of a mountain : it belongs to the Fellani, but 
 not to those of Sakatu. It is situated on a tributary of the Kawara river. 
 
 16. In 1 day, Elbetdko, a large place, with considerable market, under Khalilu, 
 who resides in Gandu. 
 
 20. In 4 Jays, Tankdla, a large place, and residence of the sultan Abu-1-Hassan. 
 24. In 4 days, Sei, a large place on the banks of the Kawara, where the same 
 language is spoken as in Timbuktu.
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 85 
 
 31^. In 7^ days, Gdndu, the residence of Al Khalili's, larger than Sakatii. 
 34. In 2^ days, Sakatii. 
 
 Route from El Dm to Timbuktu, according to Dara el Sacktanieh, who 
 performed this journey nine times: quick marches — halts not taken into 
 account. 
 
 1 day's journey to the well of El Mengiib ; arri\ ed there about 1 o'clock p.m. 
 
 55. On the fifth day to Thilb-il-belt, a village with Kasr, and a plantation of 
 palms, fig, almond, and fruit trees, with springs. Residence of the Ueled Sidi 
 Hdj el' Arbi. 
 
 11. C days, the well Dissia, with water convenient and good. 
 
 15^. 4^ days, the well Shenashan ; sandy desert, heights in the distance. 
 
 20. 4i days, the well Tdgminnant, with good water. 
 
 24. 4 days, TaiJdeni, said to be a considerable place, with houses of earth. The 
 chief of the place is the Kaid Sin. Salt, of excellent quality, is found 4 feet below 
 the surface of the ground, and is exported in pieces about 4 feet long, 1^ feet broad, 
 and upwards of 1 foot thick. 
 
 27J. 3^ days to the well, Agilt el Khand-shish. 
 
 29. 1^ days to the deep well, Undn. Good water. 
 
 34. 4^ days, Arauan, a considerable place, with market : the inhabitants Arabs. 
 
 From Arauan to Timbuktu 5 more days. 
 
 A few Words of the Timbuktu Language.* 
 
 English. 
 
 Timbul(ti'i. 
 
 sun 
 
 waina 
 
 moon 
 
 hendu 
 
 heaven 
 
 bmi 
 
 fire 
 
 ndni 
 
 rain 
 
 bana 
 
 lightning 
 
 hirri 
 
 water 
 
 haeri 
 
 year 
 
 njiim 
 
 day 
 
 silri 
 
 month 
 
 hendu 
 
 to-day 
 
 hanuo 
 
 to-morrow 
 
 soba 
 
 yesterday 
 
 bikigi 
 
 the day after 
 
 ^' ■ sobaschi 
 
 morrow 
 
 man 
 
 har 
 
 woman 
 
 wai 
 
 son 
 
 isakaina 
 
 daughter 
 
 waikaina 
 
 brother 
 
 nehar mai 
 
 sister 
 
 newai mi 
 
 father 
 
 nibiiba 
 
 mother 
 
 nia 
 
 horse 
 
 beri 
 
 camel 
 
 yu 
 
 ass 
 
 filrka 
 
 mule 
 
 alimb^a 
 
 sheep 
 
 figi 
 
 goat 
 
 henki 
 
 dog 
 
 hc'utschi 
 
 lion 
 
 koro 
 
 jackal 
 
 hentschi f<it(\ 
 
 hare 
 
 ingiri 
 
 river 
 
 isa 
 
 English. 
 
 Timbukt 
 
 wood 
 
 gongi 
 
 tree 
 
 tugtirri 
 
 timber 
 
 tugurrimi 
 
 gold 
 
 (dohob) 
 
 silver 
 
 ansarfo 
 
 iron 
 
 guro 
 
 copper 
 
 guro kire 
 
 bronze 
 
 guro kiCra 
 
 bread 
 
 tdkuld 
 
 meat 
 
 (hdm) _ 
 
 milk 
 
 ( wa giini 
 \wa bunu 
 
 cheese 
 
 tlindi 
 
 salt 
 
 kiri 
 
 pepper 
 
 dendi 
 
 gliussub 
 
 haini 
 
 ghafuli 
 
 sdba 
 
 rice 
 
 mu 
 
 beans 
 
 diinguri 
 
 basin 
 
 tsu 
 
 kettle 
 
 kusu 
 
 spoon 
 
 surto 
 
 place, village 
 
 koira 
 
 town 
 
 koira her 
 
 house 
 
 ho 
 
 door 
 
 gambu 
 
 room 
 
 teska 
 
 bed 
 
 dari 
 
 mat 
 
 fcingara 
 
 boot 
 
 hi 
 
 oar 
 
 kai 
 
 blacksmith 
 
 mallem 
 
 shepherd 
 
 figigCirkoi 
 
 ♦ Which difier, according to Dr. Latham, from the Emghedesie only in repre- 
 senting a different dialect — Ed.
 
 86 
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 Vocabulary of Buddumn, spoken by the Inhabitants of the Islands in 
 Lake Chad,* 
 
 English. 
 
 Budduma. 
 
 KiiglLih. 
 
 Budduma. 
 
 sua 
 
 iiji 
 
 elbow 
 
 iiijinn6 
 
 moon 
 
 kia 
 
 hand 
 
 
 star 
 
 sheljlgo 
 
 finger 
 
 
 dry season 
 
 kdrbai 
 
 nail 
 
 
 raiuy season 
 
 homar 
 
 leg 
 
 tshd 
 
 ■water 
 
 amai 
 
 foot 
 
 kairetshd 
 
 rain 
 
 iman 
 
 ankle bone 
 
 ilitshu 
 
 fire 
 
 aw 
 
 toe 
 
 lulle 
 
 cloud 
 
 birsa 
 
 skin 
 
 tshirregu 
 
 fog 
 
 deldmdelim 
 
 word, language 
 
 mduna 
 
 •wind 
 
 ashi 
 
 intellect 
 
 tiiikel (Born.) 
 
 dawn 
 
 kuadu 
 
 camel 
 
 lugomi 
 
 morning 
 
 hawnagiii 
 
 ox 
 
 sa 
 
 day 
 
 
 cow 
 
 
 night 
 
 
 ox of burden 
 
 t(immu 
 
 man 
 
 saiiai 
 
 horse 
 
 bokdr 
 
 people 
 
 migd 
 
 sheep 
 
 
 woman 
 
 ingerim 
 
 goat 
 
 
 father 
 
 ba 
 
 bird 
 
 
 mother 
 
 yai 
 
 fish 
 
 
 son 
 
 igenai 
 
 sea 
 
 kulu 
 
 daughter 
 
 diggeram 
 
 river 
 
 tshUllego 
 
 girl 
 
 ku? 
 
 mountain 
 
 
 brother | 
 
 
 island 
 
 
 sister > 
 
 the Borntiese 
 
 milk 
 
 ini 
 
 grandson J 
 
 
 sour milk 
 
 denam 
 
 son-in-law 
 
 amit 
 
 millet 
 
 fi'o 
 
 daugliter-in-law 
 
 amird 
 
 corn 
 
 miaw 
 
 grandfather 
 
 kilgai 
 
 meat 
 
 
 grandmother 
 
 biru 
 
 house 
 
 
 head 
 
 k>i 
 
 hut 
 
 
 eye 
 
 yii 
 
 boat 
 
 ptim 
 
 ear 
 
 simoimon 
 
 oar 
 
 tui^n 
 
 mouth 
 
 gai 
 
 spear 
 
 lai 
 
 lip, upper 
 
 gai ngedai 
 
 arrow 
 
 karni'gi 
 
 lip, lower 
 
 gai nge fari 
 
 good 
 
 ngiUa (Born. ?) 
 
 tooth 
 
 sannai 
 
 bad 
 
 abi 
 
 tongue 
 
 telani (Born.) 
 
 warm 
 
 jerau 
 
 front 
 
 bahan 
 
 cold 
 
 sdmar 
 
 hair 
 
 nji'ggo 
 
 to day 
 
 tinauim 
 
 tattooing 
 
 billa 
 
 yesterday 
 
 tshoro 
 
 chin 
 
 k(mimodu 
 
 to-morrow 
 
 bdli (Born. ?) 
 
 neck 
 
 wui 
 
 where 
 
 jiimeni 
 
 throat 
 
 gurgutd 
 
 here 
 
 ungojd 
 
 nose 
 
 tshanai 
 
 yes 
 
 jai 
 
 face 
 
 bahan 
 
 no 
 
 aio 
 
 breast 
 
 engdun 
 
 I see 
 
 wammem'in 
 
 blood 
 
 ki 
 
 I hear 
 
 wuhu'mmai 
 
 intestines 
 
 and^ 
 
 1 eat 
 
 wuhum 
 
 heart 
 
 gaigo 
 
 I drink 
 
 wushi'n 
 
 1)Oues 
 
 hai 
 
 I go 
 
 wual 
 
 marrow 
 
 tshebid 
 
 go, imp. 
 
 bt-l 
 
 shoulder 
 
 ilngurd 
 
 they go 
 
 bi'llam 
 
 back 
 
 kaia 
 
 I come 
 
 wuaw 
 
 upper arm 
 
 bibikd 
 
 come 
 
 aw 
 
 under arm 
 
 ushime 
 
 
 
 * Dr. Latham has compared this vocabulary with others, and finds that of all 
 the known languages of Africa the Budduma resembles most closely the Affadeh. 
 — Ed.
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 87 
 
 1 . Route from Sakatu to Timbuktu, accordiug to the learned Sherif Ahmedu. 
 
 (From Sukoto, direction W.) 
 
 1st day. Birni Tozo, situated on the river of Sukoto, which here passes between 
 two mountains, one of which is situated to the N. and the other to the S. Ttizo is 
 a place consisting of four or five separate villages, the houses being built of earth 
 in their lower and of reed in their upper part. Vou arrive at Aser, the whole 
 country which j'ou pass being thickly inhabited, and most rich in cattle. 
 
 2nd. Birni Silamin, a well inhabited place, having a wall in decay ; the people 
 dwelling outside of the town since the Fellani conquest. Arrive between 1 and 2 
 o'clock p.ji., after having passed a great many villages. 
 
 3rd. Keeping always on the northern side of the river of Sukoto (called Gindi), 
 which runs due N. Arrive about Aser at the town of Awgi', consisting of two sepa- 
 rate quarters, but inclosed by one wall. The market is held between the town and 
 the river. The town belongs to the kingdom of Sokoto Gaudo, the residence of 
 Khali'li being distant 2 days to the S.E. 
 
 4th. Giilma, a large walled town, situated on the northern shore of the river of 
 Sokoto, which is always to your left. The town, belonging to Kubbi, is inhabited 
 by an energetic set of people. Arrive before noon. 
 
 5th. A small village called Koido, about noon. All the country well cultivated, 
 and plenty of villages. Cross the river in the morning and lose sight of it. 
 
 6th. Kuka, a walled place, of middle size ; houses, except the house of the go- 
 vernor, are built of reed. Arrive about noon. The direction always W. 
 
 7th. Birni Debe, a walled place, but thinly inhabited ; the wall being in decay. 
 Salt is found here under Gando. 
 
 8th. Fiiga, a group of villages, situated on a wadi running S.W., and always 
 confciining water. The place is famous on account of its salt, which is dug on the 
 border of the wadi. Arrive between 1 and 2 o'clock p.m. Between Debe and 
 Fuga the land is uncultivated. 
 
 9th. Birni Kebe, a place of importance in former times. Kebe is the first place 
 of the country of Zaborma which you reach on this road ; while more to the N. 
 this country stretches farther E. into the neighbourhood of Awgi'. The language 
 of Zabernia is the Songhai, the same as that spoken in Timbuktu and Aghadez. 
 
 loth. Arrive at Tebe, a walled place, at present inhabited 0)ily by a Fellani, who 
 levies the tribute on the villages scattered around. Between Kebe and Tebe, and 
 between Fiiga and Kebe, the country is not cultivated. 
 
 11th. Arrive at Tamkala, a large place, built entirely of reed, with the exception 
 of the house of the governor There is here a rivulet close to the town, running 
 N.W. The whole counti-y which you pass on your road is thickly inhabited. 
 Arrive between 1 and 2 o'clock p.m. 
 
 12th. Sai, a considerable place, of great importance on account of its situation on 
 the Kawara, or Gi'mbala, or Isa, which you cross in boats before entering the town. 
 
 1.3th. Tshirgu, a considerable place. Arrive at sunset, after having passed many 
 villages. Have left, the 14th day, a large town governed by the sultan Malu, or 
 Madu. A short day, like the foregoing. The whole country flat. 
 
 1.5th. Tene, a town properly belonging to Giirraa, a province of Moslii, but 
 now under Sultan Malu. The inhabitants have a peculiar language (that of 
 Moshi'O. 
 
 1 (ith. Another place belonging to Gurma. All short days, of from C to "5 h. 
 travelling. 
 
 17th. A considerable place called Merkebiigu, inhabited by pagans, and governed 
 by two different sultans, the one a Fellan, the other a native from Giirma. 
 
 18th. Birni M^izu, built entirely of wood. 
 
 19th. Yaga, dependent on Khali h'. 
 
 20th. The frontier place of the territory of Yaga. 
 
 21st. Sleep in the Khalla. 
 
 22nd. Early in the morning arrive at a straggling village. The whole country 
 flat ; no streams of water. 
 
 23rd. Arrive at a place belonging to the territory of Libtako. 
 
 24th. Lihtako, a large town, situated on a small streamlet running into the 
 Kawara. It is the easternmost place of the kingdom of Khalili, upon wnom Ibra- 
 him, the governor of the town, is dependent. Superior horses, being the finest he
 
 88 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 had seen even in Marocco. Ibrahim is alile to liring a thousand horse into the 
 field, but is continually engaged in fighting with the Tawarik and tlie Auelimniiden. 
 
 25th. Sleep in the Khalla. 
 
 26th. Arriliinda, a large town, situated between two hills, and ruled by a son of 
 Mohammed Ldbbu, whose family governs all the provinces on the middle course 
 of the Niger from Arribinda and Timbuktu as far as Jinne. From Arribmda you 
 see the mountains of Humberi to your right, towards the E.N.E. 
 
 27th. Leaving Humberi far on your right, you reach the first town of Ilamdal- 
 Kihi, a place of middle size, built entirely of earth, as is the mode of building 
 through all this country from hence eastward; the height of the rooms being just 
 that of a man. The country mountainous, but the road level, the mountains 
 being on both sides. 
 
 28th A considerable town called Jilgod. The inhabitants, though Moslims, 
 belong to the sect called Matezila, and have very peculiar ideas. On your whole 
 road you leave the frontier of the extensive kingdom of Moshi about a day's 
 journey to the S. 
 
 29th. A considerable place belonging to the territory of Jilgod. 
 
 .3()th. A place called Liiro, whose houses, built one close to the other on the out- 
 side, form a kind of wall. All the water taken from wells. 
 
 31st. A place called Mundoro, situated between mountains, accessible only from 
 the N.E. 
 
 32nd. A group of villages, called Bone, entirely inhabited by Fellani, and situated 
 in a mountainous country. 
 
 33rd. Dalla, situated at the foot of a mountain, and governed by Modum Belaia, 
 who has about ,500 horse. The Fellani here have preserved their former energy 
 and martial spirit ; and do not wear wide clothes like those established in Haussa, 
 but tight ones, more resembling our close shirts. 
 
 34th. Reach Uuenza, a large town, situated at the foot of a mountain, at the 
 summit of which there are pagans. A stream of fresh water rushes down from it. 
 The country is mountainous, but the mountains are isolated. From Duenza you 
 behold the highest top of the Humberi mountains, called Walu, about 2 hours 
 to the N., of equal height to the Gelawi in the high Atlas. 
 
 [While Haj Ibrahim continues his route to the W. to Hamdallahi, the Sherif 
 takes here the northern direction towards Timbuktu.] 
 
 3.5th. Sleep in a village, where you arrive between 1 and 2 o'clock. 
 
 36th. A place inhabited by Bambara people, but under M. L(5t)bu. 
 
 37th. Kanima, a considerable place, situated on a tributary of the Kawara, and 
 the residence of a governor. The place is entirely built of earth. The principal 
 food of the inhabitants consists of rice and fish. 
 
 3Sth. Before noon reach another small branch of the Great River, where a 
 Tiiarig tribe, called K61iss(ik, have their tents or huts. 
 
 39th. Arrive at Saraiyamo, a large town, residence of a governor, and situated 
 upon this tributary. 
 
 42nd. Reach Kabera, after a 3 days' short navigation, having embarked at Sarai- 
 yamo ; the road by land being most dangerous on account of the roving parties of 
 the Tuarigs. There arc a great many villages on the banks of the river. 
 
 43rd. After a 3 hours' march, through deep sand covered with wood, you reach 
 Timbuktu. 
 
 There are three different sultans in Timbuktu ; one belonging to the Fellanis, one 
 to the Tuarigs, and one to the Arabs. The Fellani 45 years ago entered Timbuktu. 
 The Tuarigs, or rather the Auelimmiden, or Siirgu, are represented by their sultan 
 Nabera, whohasa force of from 7000 to 800(i horse, but who very seldom comes to 
 Timbuktu'. Perhaps still more powerful than these two is Hamed el Bakai, the 
 brother of the celebrated sheikh El Mukhtar, -who from Mabruk had come to 
 Timbuktu, and, supported by the merchants and by his reputation for sanctity, 
 established his authority. He died six years ago, when the Fellanis iu vain tried 
 to expel his brother.
 
 Mission to Central Africa. 8D 
 
 2 Route from Sakatii to Timbuktu ina Hamdalldhi* according to the Felldni 
 
 H(ij Ibrahim. 
 
 (From Sokoto, direction W.) 
 
 [Before giving the itinerary of Haj Ibraliim, which is not so rich as that of 
 the communicative Sherif, I must observe, that Ibrahim travelled in the rainy sea- 
 son, during which the Kawara inundates all the country around its banks.] 
 
 3rd day. In the morning arrive at Gdndo, the capital of those provinces of the 
 Fellani empire which are situated on the lower course of the Kawara, and the resi- 
 dence of Khalili. 
 
 5th. Amburso, a considerable town, situated on a small stream. On your road 
 you have hills on both siiles. 
 
 7th. Kebbi, a large town, larger than K6ka, the capital of Bormi, situated on a 
 ti'ibutary of the Kawara. The town has six gates. The name of the sultan, who is 
 dependent upon Khali'li', is Othman Magaji. The inhabitants speak the Haussa 
 language. Much rice is cultivated. 
 
 12th. Tcimkala, built of reed, but surrounded by an earth wall. On the fourth 
 day after leaving Kebbi you leave the large place called Debe at a short distance to 
 your left. The language of the natives is called by my Fellani informant, Jerma. 
 ■which he says is identic with Soughai, as is really the case, for JtJrma is nothing 
 but Erma. 
 
 16th. Sai, a large town surrounded by an earth wall, and in the interior built 
 partly of earth and partly of reed, situated on the W. shore of the river. The lan- 
 guage of the natives is Je'rma, or Songhai. 
 
 [According to Ibrahim, from Sai there are two roads leading to the W.] 
 
 18th. Tshi'rgu, governed by Gelaije, who in former times has been sultan of all 
 Masena, whose sultan is now Sheikh Omar. 
 
 19th. Sultan Madu. 
 
 21st. Mertebugu, a considerable place. 
 
 22nd. Yaga, governed by a Fellani of the name of Sajo ; Fellani and Jerma 
 being the languages spoken in the town. Durra is the principal food of the inhabit- 
 ants. The country is covered with villages, separated here and there by forest. 
 It is rich in trees, and irrigated by small streamlets. 
 
 26th. Arrive at Dori, the Fellani quarter near Libtako, ■which is the reason that 
 both names begin to be used for the same place. In Dori, which is built entirely 
 of reed, there is a Fellan governor called Ami'ri. In the rainy season there is a 
 large lake, 2 days long, to the N. of Dori, navigated by boats. 
 
 29th. Arrive at Arribinda, a large place, the first one of Masena from the E., but 
 under the Fellani. The natives speak the Songhai language. There is a considerable 
 market held here on Saturdays. The country which you pass during these two 
 days is very mountainous ; and, (hough inhabited, is full of elephants and lions. 
 There are in the rainy season pools of standing water. 
 
 32nd. Jilgodi, a large town, whose houses are built of earth and reeds. Only a 
 few hills. Pools of standing water. 
 
 35th. F.arly in the morning you reach a middle sized place of Masena called 
 Kobu. The country fiat, and full of fine trees. Much cotton and ghussub. 
 
 39th. Umbori (Hiimberi), a large place, in a mountainous country, rich in rivu- 
 lets, and thickly inhabited. 
 
 41st. Early in the morning arrive at the large town of Dalla, whose governor is 
 Modi Bole, a Fellani, like most of the inhabitants. 
 
 42nd. In the evening Duiinza, a large market-town, in a mountainous country, 
 rich in rivulets, and shaded by large trees. 
 
 43rd. About Aser reach Dumbara, a large town. No trade. Razzias. 
 
 44th. Niminaba, a middle sized place. Country hilly. 
 
 45th. Bore, also a large town. The gardens, which produce cotton, rice, corn, 
 &c., are watered by channels Mountainous. 
 
 •■ \i\ Hamdu-'lillahi (Praise be to God) was visited by Caillid, who miswrote the 
 name El, Lumdu lilluhi. It was probably the place of pilgrimage visited by Alex. 
 Scott. See Cooley's •' Negroland," Note ICO.— Ed.
 
 90 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 47th. Ti'mmc, a large town, and scat of a governor. On tlie road you behold the 
 Kawara, or rather its inundations during the rainy season, at a little distance to 
 your right. The principal produce is rice. 
 
 49th. Keach a town bearing two names, being called Konna by the Songhai 
 people, and Kari by the Fellani. Seat of a governor, and a considerable market- 
 place. 
 
 51st. Niakongo, governed by Haj Modi, the brother of Haj Omar, the Sultan of 
 Miisena. During the rainy season the waters of the Kawara approach the town 
 within a short distance. 
 
 .52nd, early, Fatuma. A mountain is to your left on the load. 
 
 .53rd. Ilamdallahi, a very large town, the capital of this part of the Fellani 
 empire, whose sultan at present is Ahmedu, the son of Mohammed Ldbbu. A long 
 day's journey. 
 
 Hamdalh'ihi, which, like Sokot(5, was built by the Fellanis, is at a short distance 
 from the S.E. branch of the Kawara, at the point where Konna is situated, and about 
 5 hours from Is.ika, which by the Fellani is called Maio Bak'u, or the Dark River, 
 while the N.W. branch is called Maio Raneu, or the White River. But leaving at 
 present the river and the island Rude, inclosed by its two branches, I add an 
 itinerary 
 
 From Hamdalluhi to Timbuktti, 
 according to a learned man, Haj Mohammed ben Bu-Bakr, a native of Hamdallahi, 
 to which, after an absence of eleven years in Yeman, he is returning. 
 
 1st day. Fatuma, a large town, at a great distance from the river, with a consi- 
 derable market. Dukheu and diirra the productions of the soil. The wells very 
 deep, from 60 to 70 dra. A long day's journey, in an easterly direction. 
 
 2nd. Uronema, to the N., a large place of the Fellani, belonging to the tribe 
 of the Feraibe, who possess plenty of cattle. The country flat ; mountains 
 towards the S. 
 
 3rd. Konna (not to be mistaken for the above-mentioned place of the same 
 name situated farther down the river, and in former times on the island Rude), 
 a large town, at a short distance from the Bahr el Azrck, and is the mai'ket-place 
 for Moshi. The inhabitants of Konna belong to the Songhai^ 
 
 4th. Koisa, a considerable place, inhabited by Fellani, with Sheikh Mohammed, 
 and situated close to the river. Rice and dukhen are the principal products. 
 
 5th. Sennegebulu, a small village of the tribe Urubo, situated close to the river. 
 Sennegebiilu is the last place of the territory of Hamdalldhi in this direction, and 
 Hamid's territory begins. 
 
 6th. Dera, another place of the Fellani, of the tribe Gimbelle, with three sub- 
 divisions, the lujebtube, the Fittobe, and the Andujiga. Their chief is called Si'd. 
 A long day, from sunrise till sunset. 
 
 7th. Ummcre, a small village, with a mixed population of Fellani and Songhai 
 people. A short day. 
 
 8th. Duka. a village of the Gimbelle-Fellani, far from the river. Between I and 
 2 o'clock P.M., as in general. 
 
 10th. Early in the morning arrive at the large town Giinki, situated upon the 
 river. 
 
 nth. Korobongo, a small village. 
 
 12th. Koro-dingi, another small village, whence a small river, winding towards 
 Guiiki, flows into the Kawara. 
 
 I4th. Arrive before noon at K'ikuru, a large town, inhabited by Fellani, and 
 governed by Sultan 'Ali. The whole country is thickly cultivated. 
 
 16th. Orogonia, a large place, inhabited by Ulemas of the Fellani, and surrounded 
 by a great many small villages. 
 
 ITth. Kiibara, after having crossed the Kawara. (My informant tells me that 
 Kilbara is almost entirely inhabited by Songhai people.) 
 
 18th. Timbuktu. 
 
 Route from Timbuktu to Homddlldln. ( Westward.) 
 (Slow travelling, about 4 hours per day.) 
 1st day. Gonia, a group of villages. 
 2nd. Tshilli, the same.
 
 3 fission to Central Africa. 91 
 
 Srd. Kiira, situated on an island in the Blue River, which is crossed. Fine trees. 
 4th. Dire,* a considerable place on the \V. bank. 
 5th. Tshuki (Choki), a large walled town on the Lake Tele. 
 6th. Tindirma, on the river. 
 
 Tth. Auya, a large group of villages to the N. of the Blue River. (Up to this 
 place the inhabitants are Songhai.) 
 8th. Fariraaka, inhabited by Fulan. 
 9th. A village of the Gimbella-Ful^n. 
 10th. Konari, another of the same. 
 11th. A market-town, inhabited by the same. 
 12th. Giroe, a large town. 
 13th. HamdalMhi. 
 
 [For the following the Editor is indebted to the politeness of Dr. R. Pauli, 
 Secretary to the Chevalier Bunsen.] 
 
 The first and greater part of Dr. Barth's Report about Aghades was despatched 
 from Tintellust before the expedition started for the Sudan. The rest arrived, 
 accompanied by letters to the Chevalier Bunsen, dated Kano, Empire of Bornu, 
 25th and 2Sth of February, 1851. 
 
 It appears that in the beginning of December last the travellers had left the 
 country of Ahir, and a little after Christmas they crossed at Damergu the frontier 
 of the Sudan. On the 11th of January the three separated. Mr. Richardson went 
 by Zinder straight towards Ki'ika, the capital of the Emperor of Bornu ; Dr. Over- 
 weg made a geological excursion to Marraji and Gober; and Dr. Barth proceeded 
 south, wishing, if possible, to explore the country of Adamawa, and the waters that 
 feed the Niger from that hitherto unknown district. 
 
 Deficiency of means, however, hindered him from going farther than Kano, from 
 whence he intended to take the shortest road to Kuka, in order to join Richardson 
 and Overweg, who likewise had used all their goods, and hoped to find a new sup- 
 ply deposited with the Emperor of Bornii. 
 
 Dr. Barth's road from Damergu to Kand passed by Tasana and Katshna, through 
 a wild forest land, rendered unsafe by plundering gangs of Fellauis. The Sultan 
 of Katshna, who governs part of the country of the Fellanis, detained Dr. Barth 
 some days, until he extorted from him a high passage money. 
 
 The power of the Sultan of Sakatii is described as kept up only by the imposi- 
 tion of large tribute upon caravans, the whole country being in a poor and decaying 
 condition, whereas in Bornii a very flourishing state of things is, on the contiary, 
 visible, and European travellers meet everywhere with a kind reception. 
 
 The land around Kami is very fertile and admirably cultivated, being the richest 
 province of the empire. The season, however, when Dr. Barth paid a visit to this 
 place was very unhealthy. This circumstance, added to the low state of his 
 finances, rendered it necessary for him to hasten on at once to Kuka. 
 
 Soon afterwards arrived the melancholy news of the death of Mr. Richardson, 
 which took place on the 4th of March, from dysentery, on the road between 
 Zinder and Kiika. Dr. Barth, whose letters are dated Giimmel, March the 11th, 
 and Kiika, April the 3rd, received the intelligence of the death of the leader of the 
 expedition on the 2r)th of March, and hastened on to the capital of Hornii, in order 
 to make the necessary arrangements. Having, upon his arrival at Kiika, found no 
 supplies, he borrowed some money from the Vezir, El Haj Beshir, of whose kind- 
 ness throughout he speaks in the highest terms. 
 
 On the 13th of April he mentions having i-eceived the gratifying intelligence of 
 the safety of Dr. Overweg, who was on his road to Kiika, and that the latter had 
 written to Professor Ritter, of Berlin, on the 10th of April, from Zinder. On the 
 28th of the same month Dr. Barth gives a short notice of his first excursion to 
 Lake Tsdd, in the jitnyle surrounding which, he had been on horseback four days — 
 
 * Said to be the place of origin of the Sonrai (Songhai), who are probably 
 identical with the Ermii, a section of the Senhaja, spread over the whole country 
 towards the E. ^
 
 92 Mission to Central Africa. 
 
 half the time in water ; at times up to his horse's back. Owing to the difficulty 
 he experienced in finding the lake, he began to suspect that, after all, it was but a 
 succession of swamps.* After having at length succeeded in penetrating through 
 the mass of jungle, high grass, and forest, he arrived in sight of the lake, and 
 visited the landing places between Angornii and Kawa. 
 
 On the 7tli November the Chevalier Bunsen received several letters which had 
 arrived at Tripoli with two mails, the latter of which had come all the way from 
 Kiika in the short space of fifty-six days. The dates of the letters are from the 
 10th of May to the loth of August. 
 
 It appears that Dr. Overweg, who returned from his expedition to Marraji and 
 Gober by way of Zinder, joined Dr. Barth in Kiika in the first week of May. After 
 having arranged the most necessary affairs of the late Mr. Richardson, Dr. Barth 
 started, on the 29th of May, for Adamawa, tlie Sultan and Vezir of Bornu suppl}'- 
 ing him very kindly with everything necessary. lie proceeded in a south-eastern 
 direction through the country of the Marghi — a heathen negro tribe which sepa- 
 rates the Bornuese from the Fellatas, and supplies the slave-markets of both. They 
 have their own language, and worship in sacred groves ; their principal image 
 being a granite rock in their chief town, Kobtshi. 
 
 At Mora, the capital of the Mandara country, Dr. Barth first saw the mountains 
 of that name. They are not a connected chain, crossing central Africa from W. to 
 E., but extend into plains towards W., S., and N. The mountain-range which 
 figures on the maps under the name of Mendif, is nothing but a very steep single 
 hil, Iwhich is surmounted by a Fellata village. 
 
 At Issege, a few miles S. of Mora, he crossed a rivulet coming from the S. and 
 flowing towards the Shary. 
 
 Uba, the first town of the Fellatas, is about 190 miles from Kuka, at the foot of 
 the mountain, which consists only of huge granite rocks. The country of Adamawa 
 has fine pasture grounds, and produces excellent cattle. The Fellatas till the 
 ground only by means of slaves, which, with ivory, form their principal objects of 
 export. 
 
 Fifty-two miles farther on is a place called Saraw ; and 34 miles beyond that, 
 not far from Sulleri, Dr. Barth discovered, on the 18th of June, the two principal 
 rivers of Adamawa^— the Benud (undoubtedly identical with the Tshadda, which 
 falls into the lower course of the Niger) and the Faro, both of which rivers join at 
 a place called Taiipe. The Benue, said to be here nine days' journey from its origin, 
 comes from the E. and S.E., is half an English mile broad, and about nine feet 
 deep. The Faro is only half a mile broad, with a depth of from three to four feet. 
 Dr. Barth crossed them both not far from their junction, the first in a canoe, the 
 second on horseback. The very strong current flowed due W. The waters rise 
 from the end of June until the end of September. 
 
 Dr. Barth reached Yola, the capital of Ad<imawa, on the 22nd of June ; but 
 Mohammed Loiil, the Sultan of the Fellatas, obliged him to leave that place after 
 three days' residence, because he came from the Sheikh of Bornii, the enemy of the 
 Fellatas, and was not provided with a recommendation from the Sultan of Sakatd, 
 whose slave he boasts of being. The Doctor arrived at Kuka on the 22nd of July, 
 satisfied with having established the position of the watershed between the rivers 
 flowing into the Niger and those running into the Lake Tsild. As his guide, 
 Mallem Katori, was detained by the Sultan at Yola, he hopes to hear more respect- 
 ing this important country of Adamawa upon his return to Kuka. 
 
 In the mean time Dr. Overweg had put the boat together w hich had been carried 
 all the way from Tripoli, the Sheikh and his people tiiking the greatest interest in 
 the performance. t On the 18th of June the boat, carrying four guns, was launched, 
 christened the ' Lord Palmerston,' and hoisted the British flag. Dr. Overweg 
 started the next day from Bree, a small place near Kiika, on his first voyage on the 
 lake. After sailing 12 miles he touched at the first island, of which there are very 
 many, all covered with wood, full of inhabitants, and abounding with hippopotami 
 and elephants. The eastern coast of the lake calb'd Kaiiem-Wudai is not more 
 than GU miles distant from Bree, but the lake seems to extend from N. to S- still 
 more. It is from 10 to 15 English feet deep, the water being -sweet and clear. 
 
 * Ihe same occurred to Major Denham. 
 
 f There are with the mission two P^nglish sailors ; a carpenter and another. — Ed.
 
 Mission to Central Africa- 93 
 
 During the rainy season it enters the country of Borgu in a N.E. direction, 
 where it vanishes in the sand. At intervals the lake has been dried up altogether, 
 the last time being six years ago. 
 
 The Biddumas, or the pagan inhabitants of the islands, are pirates, and are con- 
 stantly at war with their neighbours of Bornii and Wadai. They use very long 
 boats, more than 40 feet in length, without sails, but propelled by long poles. Dr. 
 Overweg visited fifteen of their villages, and was everywhere well received by the 
 natives, some of whom even accompanied him back to Kiika. He was prevented 
 by hostilities existing between the adjacent tribes from exploring the northern and 
 eastern shores ; but did not return before the 8th of August to Kuka, where he was 
 received by Dr. Barth with good tidings from Europe: the long-desired letters, a 
 fresh supply, and the donation of H. M. the King of Prussia having arrived. 
 
 Dr. Overweg concludes his last letter with the news that the old Sultan of Wadai, 
 who had visited Mecca and Constantinople, was just dead, and that there was some 
 hope of visiting that country. The intelligent and amiable Sheikh of Bornii is very 
 anxious to possess a squadron of European boats on the lake, and promises every 
 assistance in his power to the mission. 
 
 Tlie travellers expect that it would occupy twelve months to finish their exami- 
 nation of the shores of the lake on the E. and N., as yet almost entirely unexplored, 
 and to visit the country of the Baghennis. 
 
 The money and goods which had been sent out by the British Government for 
 the late Mr. Richardson had, by Lord Palmerston's orders, been placed at their 
 disposal, to enable them to carry out the objects of the mission. They had already 
 availed themselves of the favourable disposition of the Sultan of Bornii to conclude 
 with him, on the part of England, a treaty of commerce, which may be considered 
 as the first step towards the substitution of a commercial intercourse and exchange 
 of the rich products of that part of Africa for the slave trade. 
 
 The ultimate object of the travellers is still to endeavour to cross the centre of 
 Africa in a S.E. direction, to the coast of Mombas or to Mozambique, for which 
 purpose they have already found au experienced guide and collected much valuable 
 information. — Ed.
 
 ""fs^ "» ooo<: 
 
 S * i^ I. JO IjIV 
 
 *'»^ 
 
 .y«^'
 
 University of California 
 
 SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 
 405 Hilgard Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90024-1388 
 
 Return this material to the library 
 
 from which it was borrowed. 
 
 n 
 
 OnL 
 
 m 
 
 * i|Jl(SPjle9i3SPIil)rary 
 JUN s. igjig 
 RECEIVED 
 
 Form ]
 
 DT 
 
 351 
 R8l2p
 
 
 
 
 ,:Sr^!^' 
 
 J'